Bentley Autoplant Design V8i Ss1 4o12a

>.  Static text is added by simply entering text.   You can preview the results for the current definition clicking Preview.

6. Input the definition in the Long Description text box as shown below:   < >X<<MAIN_SIZE>>

Note:

Square brackets around the text, [‐‐‐], ensure that the text will not be written when the next field is null.  If the text is not enclosed in square brackets, the text is only written when the value for the next field in the criteria is not null.  This does not apply for text strings at the end of the criteria.

7. Click Preview to view an example of the results as shown below.

8. Click OK to apply the new definition to the spec. Feb‐10

47 Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Specification Generator

Managing Spec Sections

Note:

The Long Description Preview function available to each section may not always properly concatenate a custom Long Description, but the spec will build with the correct information.

Î Exercise 3: Set the Long Description for a section row In the previous exercise you learned how to set the Long Description for the entire spec. However there might be situations where we want a particular section row to have different criteria for generating the Long Descriptions.

Note:

The Long Description criteria for a row would override the default Long Description criteria defined for the whole spec.

For pipe, you will learn how to modify the Long Description to display as shown below:

PIPE, SMLS, SCH 80 CS, A106‐B

where the schedule is the actual schedule for the pipe.

1. Open the Description Builder by a right‐click in the first Constraints row of the PIPE section.

2. Select LONG_DESC from the Description fields and click Edit.   3. Enter the definition in the Long Description text box as shown below:    PIPE, SMLS, SCH <<SCHEDULE>> CS, A106‐B

4. Click Preview to view an example of the results as shown.

5. Since you want to apply this definition to the other rows in the PIPE section, select the entire string in the Definition text box, then right‐click and select Copy from the context menu to copy this string to the clipboard.

6. Click OK to apply the new definition to the current row of the PIPE section.



Feb‐10


7. Open the Description Builder and edit the Long Description for each of the other PIPE section rows. When the dialog displays, make the text box active, and right‐click to select Paste.

8. Set the Long Description definition for all rows in the GLOBE VALVE and GATE VALVE to ‘<<SHORT_DESC>>,  CLASS< >#, <<END_COND_1>> [X] <<END_COND2>>, <<MAT_GRADE>>’

Modifying Piece Marks The Piece Mark values in the catalogs are often not the desired values for the specification components.  These values are often used by s to identify spec components. The Specification Generator enables you to build the Piece Mark from a combination of static text as well as catalog fields.

Setting the Piece Mark for the Entire Spec Î Exercise 1: Modify the Piece Mark to display as shown below:

Created from the critera:

< ><<STYPE>><<MAIN_SIZE>>X< >X< >

1. Open the Piece Mark Editor from Spec > Default Description Builder. 2. From the Fields dialog select the PIECE_MARK field name and click Edit to display the dialog.

Note:

Or you can double click the PIECE_MARK field name.

The following dialog appears.

Feb‐10




The definition is created by selecting fields from the list. Fields added to the description appear in this format: < >.    Static text is added by entering directly into the Definition field. Clicking Preview   displays the definition.

3. Enter the definition in the Piece Mark text box as shown below:   < ><<STYPE>><<MAIN_SIZE>>X< >X< >

Note:

Square brackets around the text, [‐‐‐], ensure that the text is always written even when the next field is null.  If the text is not enclosed in square brackets, the text is only written when the value for the next field in the criteria is not null.  This does not apply for text strings at the end of the criteria.

4. Click Preview to view the results.

5. Click OK to apply the new definition to the spec. Note:


The Piece mark Preview function available to each section may not always properly concatenate a custom Piece Mark, but the spec will build with the correct information.


Feb‐10


Setting the Piece Mark for a Specific Row In the previous exercise you learned how to set the Piece Mark for the entire spec. However, there might be situations where we want a particular section row to have different criteria for generating the Piece Mark. To edit the Piece Mark specific to selected constraints, you will launch the editor from the specific section row.

Note:

The PIECE_MARK criteria for a row would override the default PIECE_MARK criteria defined for the whole spec.

Î Exercise 2: Modify the Piece Mark to appear as shown.

Base‐‐‐AT_PIPE1

Created from the criteria:

<<MODULE_NAME>>‐< ><<MAIN_SIZE>>

1. Right‐click in the first constraints row of the PIPE section.   2. From the context menu displayed select Description Builder.

3. From the Fields dialog select the PIECE_MARK field name and click Edit to display the dialog.

Note:

Or you can double click the PIECE_MARK field name.

4. Enter the definition in the Piece Mark  text box as shown: <<MODULE_NAME>>‐‐‐< ><<MAIN_SIZE>>

Feb‐10




5. Click Preview to view the results.

6. Since you may want to apply this Piece Mark definition to the other rows in the PIPE section, you can select the entire string in the Piece Mark text box, then right‐click and select Copy from the context menu to copy this string to the clipboard.

7. Click OK to apply the new definition to the current row of the PIPE section. 8. Open the Piece Mark Editor for each of the other PIPE section rows. When the dialog displays, click in the Piece Mark text box to make it active, then right‐click and select Paste.

Note:

You may get an error, where the amount of characters specified in your description exceeds the allowable limit. If so, rework your description.



Feb‐10


Multi‐Item Filtering In the next exercise, you will create a section called OLET and configure the constraints using the following information.

Note:

OLET is one of the pre‐defined section names.    3/8" ‐ 2 1/2"

Class 3000# SW CS, A105



Elbolet



Sockolet



Latrolet

3" ‐ 48"

SCH STD BW CS, A105



Elbolet



Latrolet



Weldolet

Î Exercise 1: Create an OLET section   1. From the menu select Spec > Add Section. 2. Select OLET from the drop‐down list, and click OK.

3. Click Select Classes in the OLET section to  which classes are being selected.  You should see the nine (9) olet classes as shown below.

Feb‐10




4. Click Cancel to close. You will now need to edit the constraints for OLET and add columns for both SCHEDULE and CATALOG.

5. Click Modify Contraints in the Constraints section.

6. Locate SCHEDULE in the available fields and add this to the Selected Fields list.   7. Repeat the process to add CATALOG. 8. Click OK.   Now let’s add the details

9. Add a new row using + button



Feb‐10


10. Set the first row as 3/8 to 2+1/2, Rating 3000LB, EndCond SWF, and CATALOG BONNEY FORGED.  The Specification Generator should return 91 records.

11. A Preview Spec shows these are all the small bore elbolets, sockolets and latrolets required. Add a new row and set the constraint values as: 3” to 48”, End Cond BW, CATALOG BONNEY FORGED, Schedule STD.     Specification Generator should return 687 records.

12. Looking at the Preview Spec, you will notice that there are unwanted olet types such as sweepolets and insert weldolets.  You need to build a filter that limits the choices to elbolets, latrolets and weldolets.

Note:

Feb‐10

You can preview the component records of a single row in a section by right‐clicking in the desired row then selecting the Preview option from the context menu.



Adding Fitting Sections

Adding Fitting Sections In the following exercises you will be adding four new sections and set the filters.

Î Exercise 1: Add the ELBOWS section 1. From the menu select Spec > Add Section.   2. Type ELBOWS in the Add New Spec Section name field and click OK. 3. Click Select Classes… and set the classes to: AT_ELBOW_LR_45, AT_ELBOW_LR_90, AT_ELBOW_RED_90, and AT_ELBOW_SR_90.

4. Use Modify Contraints to add the CATALOG column to the Constraints grid. 5. Click OK. 6. Set the Constraints for the elbows as listed below. 1/4" ‐ 2 1/2"




90° Elbow



45° Elbow

3" ‐ 48"

SCH STD BW CS, A234‐WPB



90° Elbow



90° Reducing Elbow



90° SR Elbow



45° Elbow

7. For CATALOG select Ladish. 8. These constraints result in 124 total elbow records.



Feb‐10


Î Exercise 2: Add a TEES section 1. From the menu select Spec > Add Section.   2. Type TEES in the Add New Spec Section name field and click OK. 3. Pick Select Classes… and set the classes to AT_TEE and AT_TEE_RED_BRANCH. 4. Select Modify Contraints and add the CATALOG column to the Constraints grid.   5. Click OK.   6. Set the Constraints for the tees as listed below. 1/4" ‐ 2 1/2"


Tee

3" – 24"

SCH 40 BW CS, A234‐WPB



Tee



Reducing Tee

30" ‐ 48"

Sch 20 BW CS, A234‐WPB



Tee



Reducing Tee

7. For CATALOG select Ladish for the small size. There are no Ladish Tees available for the larger size.   These constraints result in 199 total Tees records.

Feb‐10




Î Exercise 3: Add a FLANGE Section 1. From the menu select Spec > Add Section.   2. Select FLANGE from the Add New Spec Section dialog. Note:

Flange is a pre‐defined section name.

3. Click OK. 4. Pick Select Classes… and set the classes to: AT_FLANGE_BLD, AT_FLANGE_LAP, AT_FLANGE_ORF, AT_FLANGE_RED, AT_FLANGE_REDSLIP, AT_FLANGE_SLP, AT_FLANGE_SW, AT_FLANGE_THD, AT_FLANGE_WNK and AT_STUB_END_LJ.

5. Select Modify Contraints.   Add the CATALOG column to the Constraints grid.

6. Set the Constraints for the flanges as listed: 1/4" ‐ 2 1/2"

Class 150# RF SW CS, A105

3" ‐ 24"

Class 150# RF SO CS, A105   Note: Select AT_FLANGE_SLP as CLASS_NAME

3" ‐ 24"

Class 150# RF WN CS, A105

Note: Select AT_FLANGE_WNKas CLASS_NAME.

Blind Flange Class 150# RF CS, A105

Note: Select AT_FLANGE_BLD as CLASS_NAME

1/2" ‐ 24"

Orifice Flange Class 600# RF SW CS, A105

Note: Select AT_FLANGE_ORF as CLASS_NAME

1" ‐ 2 1/2"

These constraints result in 59 total flange records.



Feb‐10

Î Exercise 4: Add A FASTENER section For the bolts and gaskets, you will use the pre‐defined FASTENER section.

1. Select Spec > Add Section.    2. Select FASTENER from Add New Spec Section dialog. 3. Click OK. 4. The Classes have been preset to AT_BOLT, AT_GASKET, and AT_LUG_BOLT. 5. Select Modify Contraints and add COMP_LEN and CLASS_NAME columns to the Constraints grid

6. Set the Constraints for the fasteners as described below: Gaskets ¼” – 24”

Class 150# Grafoil Ghe 1/8” Thk

¼” – 24”

Class 300# Grafoil Ghe 1/8” Thk

Bolts 1/4" ‐ 24"

Bolts A193‐B16 w/2 A194‐2H NUTS

These constraints result in 81 total records.

Feb‐10



Reporting Functions

Reporting Functions Specification Generator contains a selection of reports that are easy to generate and modify. These reports are stored in the SPECGEN‐REPORTS.MDB file, a Microsoft Access database, located in the ..\REPORTS sub‐directory of your AutoPLANT 3D installation.   The Microsoft Access Report Writer utility is used to modify or add a report.

Generate a Report Î Exercise 1: Run a Specification Generator report 1. If you have not built the spec since your last changes, build it now using Spec > Build Spec.

2. Select Spec > Report Print/Preview to open the dialog.

3. Select a report and then click Preview to display the report similar to the one shown below.    If you did not build the spec previously, it will be built automatically before generating the preview.

4. When finished, click OK to close the preview window.



Feb‐10

Reporting Functions

Feb‐10



Reporting Functions

Modify a Report The MicroSoft Access Report Writer is used to modify or add a report. It is beyond the scope of this course to teach all the methods for creating an Access report, so for the following exercise you will learn how to modify a report by replacing the Bentley logo on an existing report.

Î Exercise 2: Modify the logo on an existing Spec Report 1. Open ..Bentley\Plant XM\Reports\Specgen‐Reports.mdb. 2. The file opens in Microsoft Access. Insure that the reports tab or object is selected.

3. Right‐click on the Detail by Size report, then select Design View from the context menu.   The report will be opened as shown below.

4. Click on the Bentley logo and click Delete. 5. Select Insert > Picture to insert your company logo or other graphic. e 6. When the browse dialog appears, select the picture you want to use and click OK. 7. Use the grip nodes to move and size the graphic. 8. Close the design view by clicking the X in the upper right corner.    9. Click Yes to save the changes. 10. Double‐click on the report to bring up the preview. Close the preview when you are finished.

11. Exit Microsoft Access. 12. that this report runs with your changes inside of SpecGen. Specification Generator


Feb‐10

Reporting Functions

This exercise completes the AutoPLANT Specifications XM fundamentals course.

Creating Specifications for the Production Environment To complete this specification for use in a production environment, you would need to add items such as couplings, unions, caps, plugs, reducers, swages, laterals, crosses and possibly other classes of fittings.    This course is intended to give you a brief introduction to creating specifications.

Feb‐10



Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed this module, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions Answer these questions to be True or False. Detailed answers appear on the following page.

1. When you add a section to a specification, you can define which catalogs the components will be selected from.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. The Class Browser provides an easy to use dialog for adding and removing specific classes from a spec.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. The Preview Spec gives a listing of all component records listed in the spec.   ƒ ƒ

True False



Feb‐10

Module Review

Answers 1. True: Once you define a new section in a spec, you are automatically prompted to select the catalogs from which the components will be chosen from. This feature allows you to specify popular manufacturers.

2. True: The Class Browser provides a fast method for the  to simply select the classes to be included in the spec.

3. True: Once you have created the sections of the spec, you can preview the results before you “build” the spec.

Summary You are now able to:

ƒ

Understand the relationship between the Specification Generator and the piping designer’s spec sheet.

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Learn the basic steps for creating a spec Create spec sections Learn how to manage spec sections   Modify piece marks Create multi‐item filters Generate and modify a report

Feb‐10



Module Review

This page intentionally left blank.



Feb‐10

Course Summary   Review Now that you have completed this course, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions 1. Classes specify the commodity contained within a piping configuration.   ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Component catalogs are built into the application to provide a pick list for placement within a model.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. AutoPLANT Piping database tools provide a useful method for determining the class definition of a specific component.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Insurance Agencies require the owner of a facility to comply with rigid industry codes.   ƒ ƒ

True False

5. Crane catalogs have only tables for Flanges and Valves.   ƒ ƒ

True False

6. Specifications are created from only one catalog. ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

True False


Course Summary

Review

7. Class data for placing a component in a piping model is read from the class.ini file.   ƒ ƒ

True False

8. Specification Generator enables you to create a spec using a familiar work method. ƒ ƒ

True False

9. By deg specific constraints in a spec, the number of components to select from is minimized.

ƒ ƒ

True False

10. When you add a section to a specification, you can define which catalogs the components will be selected from.

ƒ ƒ

True False

11. The Class Browser provides an easy to use dialog for adding and removing specific classes from a spec.

ƒ ƒ

True False

12. The Preview Spec function gives a detailed listing of all component records in the spec.   ƒ ƒ

True False

Course Summary


Dec‐09

Review

Answers 1. True: A class identifies the commodity within a pipe, including whether it is a liquid or gas, as well as operating temperatures, pressures and corrosiveness.

2. False: Component catalogs are installed with AutoPLANT. These catalogs provide data on thousands of components from which manufacturer specific specs can be produced.

3. True: If you want to find the class definition of a specific component in a model, use the Piping > Database Tools > Edit component command. Selecting the component lists the class name and all relative data for the component.

4. True:  Compliance to industry standards are generally mandatory and enforced by regulatory agencies. The importance of adhering to these codes begins at the design stage by creating industry compliant specifications.

5. True: Crane does not manufacture fitting other than flanges and valves.   6. False: Specifications can be created from single catalogs or by combining fittings from multiple catalogs.

7. True: The class.ini file is one of several initialization files installed with AutoPLANT. The program reads placement information stored in the .ini file

8. True: Specification Generator uses the same design philosophy as the designers spec sheet.

9. True: By defining constraints within the spec sections, the volume of components to choose from is reduced, eliminating mistakes and increasing productivity.

10. True: Once you define a new section in a spec, you are automatically prompted to select the catalogs from which the components will be chosen from. This feature allows you to specify popular manufacturers.

11. True: The Class Browser provides a fast method for the  to simply select the classes to be included in the spec.

12. True: Once you have created the sections of the spec, you can preview the results before you “build” the spec.

Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

You are now able to:

ƒ

Understand the use of Catalogs and Specifications in relation to spec‐driven component placement

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Create a specification from multiple catalogs Manage spec data by removing unwanted entries   Customize descriptions and restraints Generate and modify Microsoft Access reports

Course Summary


Dec‐09

AutoPLANT Equipment Fundamentals V8i Bentley Institute Course Guide

TRN010270‐1/0003

Copyright Information

Trademarks AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are ed trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.   AutoCAD is a ed trademark of Autodesk, Inc.   Other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

Copyrights ©2000‐2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.   MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.   All rights reserved.

V8i


Dec-09

Table of Contents Course Overview ________________________________________________________ 1 Course Description ___________________________________________________________ 1 Target Audience _____________________________________________________________ 1 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 1 Course Objectives ____________________________________________________________ 1 Modules Included ____________________________________________________________ 2 System Requirements ________________________________________________________ 2 AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products _______________________________________________ 2 ProjectWise ed Versions ______________________________________________________ 3 Databases ed _______________________________________________________________ 3 Installing the Training Project __________________________________________________ 3 Introductory Knowledge ______________________________________________________ 5 Questions: ________________________________________________________________________ 5 Answers _________________________________________________________________________ 7

Application Startup _____________________________________________________ 9 Overview ___________________________________________________________________ 9 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 9 Objectives __________________________________________________________________ 9 AutoPLANT Application Startup _______________________________________________ 10 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Start Menu __________________________________ 10 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Desktop Icon ________________________________ 11 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from Document Manager ______________________________ 12

Equipment Model Setup _________________________________________________ 15 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 15 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 15 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 15 Creating a New Equipment Model _____________________________________________ 16 Deleting Documents _______________________________________________________________ 21 Save Command ___________________________________________________________________ 22 Save As Command ________________________________________________________________ 22 Reopening Your Model from Document Manager _______________________________________ 22 Dec‐09

i Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Touring the Interface ________________________________________________________ 23 Equipment Menu _________________________________________________________________ 23 Toolbars and Tooltips ______________________________________________________________ 24 Drawing Preferences ________________________________________________________ 26 Component Preferences______________________________________________________ 27 Adding a New Line Number _________________________________________________________ 29 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 31 Questions: _______________________________________________________________________ 31 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 32 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 32

Work Areas ___________________________________________________________ 33 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 33 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 33 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 33 What is a Work Area? ________________________________________________________ 34 Creating a Work Area ________________________________________________________ 36 Asg Drawing Member Status ___________________________________________________ 37 Location Points _____________________________________________________________ 39 WP Point ________________________________________________________________________ 40 Display Modes _____________________________________________________________ 43 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 45 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 45 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 46 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 46

Equipment Modeling ___________________________________________________ 47 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 47 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 47 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 47 Equipment Menu ___________________________________________________________ 48 Modeling Equipment Components _____________________________________________ 50 Placing Components By Location Point ________________________________________________ 52 Placement By Entering Coordinates ___________________________________________________ 53 Editing Components _______________________________________________________________ 53 Deleting Components ______________________________________________________________ 54 Nozzle Placement ___________________________________________________________ 55 Radial Nozzles ____________________________________________________________________ 56 Line No. _________________________________________________________________________ 56 Axial Nozzles _____________________________________________________________________ 57 Modeling Pumps ____________________________________________________________ 58 Table of Contents

ii Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Dec‐09

Table of Contents

Changing Preference Control Settings _________________________________________________ 60 Add a Suction Nozzle ______________________________________________________________ 62 Add a Discharge Nozzle ____________________________________________________________ 64

Modeling Horizontal Vessels __________________________________________________ 65 Attaching Radial Nozzles ___________________________________________________________ 67 Attaching Axial Nozzles _____________________________________________________________ 69 Modeling Vertical Vessels ____________________________________________________ 71 Modify Vessel T‐136 _______________________________________________________________ 73 Add Nozzles to T‐136 ______________________________________________________________ 74 Challenge Exercise ________________________________________________________________ 78 Modeling Heat Exchangers ___________________________________________________ 79 Adding Nozzles to E‐106 ____________________________________________________________ 81 Associative Components _____________________________________________________ 82 Vessel Components _______________________________________________________________ 83 Associated Primitives ______________________________________________________________ 86 Structural Components ____________________________________________________________ 87 Copy Component Command __________________________________________________ 89 Creating a Spare Pump _____________________________________________________________ 90 Create a Second Heat Exchanger _____________________________________________________ 92 Custom Components ________________________________________________________ 94 Building Custom Components _______________________________________________________ 95 Creating a Component from Simple Primitives __________________________________________ 98 Creating  Defined Equipment ___________________________________________________ 101 Create a Custom Vessel ___________________________________________________________ 103 Module Review ____________________________________________________________ 105 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 105 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 106 Summary _________________________________________________________________ 106

Database Management ________________________________________________ 107 Overview _________________________________________________________________ 107 Prerequisites ______________________________________________________________ 107 Objectives ________________________________________________________________ 107 Introductory Knowledge ____________________________________________________ 108 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 108 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 108 Managing the Database _____________________________________________________ 109 Database Tools Menu _____________________________________________________________ 109 Editing Database Records ___________________________________________________ 110 Editing Database Records ___________________________________________________ 110 Cleaning the Database ______________________________________________________ 111 Active Connections _______________________________________________________________ 111

Dec‐09

iii Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Repairing / Rebuilding the Database___________________________________________ 112 Editing a Database Record _________________________________________________________ 113 Report Generator Utility ____________________________________________________ 115 Crystal Reports Engine ____________________________________________________________ 115 Report Types ____________________________________________________________________ 115 Generating Equipment and Nozzle Reports _____________________________________ 116 Equipment Report _______________________________________________________________ 117 Nozzle Schedule Report ___________________________________________________________ 119 Module Review ____________________________________________________________ 121 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 121 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 122 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 122 Summary _________________________________________________________________ 122

Course Summary ______________________________________________________ 123 Review ___________________________________________________________________ 123 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 123 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 125

Table of Contents

iv Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Dec‐09

Course Overview Course Description This course is designed for the Piping Designer or Drafter who is new to the AutoPLANT Design applications. Student becomes familiar with the interface and tools for modeling equipment components within a shared project environment. Horizontal, vertical vessels and pumps are modeled within a pre‐defined Work Area. Students learn how to manage the component data for creating equipment component and nozzle reports, thus providing a solid foundation for the AutoPLANT Piping Fundamentals Course.

Target Audience ƒ

This course is designed for the new and existing s with little or no exposure to an equipment modeling application.

Prerequisites ƒ

The student must have a basic understanding of AutoCAD 2D and 3D functionality.

ƒ

Prior to taking this course it is highly recommended that the student review the AutoPLANT Equipment tutorial delivered with the application.

Course Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Understand the advantages to the different data storage methods

ƒ

Create a three‐dimensional model from equipment components

ƒ

Create equipment and nozzle reports


Course Overview

Modules Included

Modules Included ƒ

Equipment Model Setup

ƒ

Work Areas

ƒ

Equipment Modeling

ƒ

Database Management

System Requirements   You must have a CD drive or internet access for product installation. The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in the AutoPLANT Plant Design V8i (Version 08.11.05).   Processor:

Intel Pentium 4 processor and AMD Athlon, 3.0 Ghz or greater or Intel or AMD Dual Core Processor, 2.0 GHz or greater

Operating System:

Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2or later

Windows Vista 32 bit SP1

Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1A or later

Internet:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 or greater

Memory:

2GB or greater

Hard Disk:

2GB free hard disk space

Input Device:

Industry‐standard input device ed by Windows

Output Device:

Industry‐standard output device ed by Windows

Industry‐standard video card/monitor

Video Graphics Card:

AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products AutoCAD:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009

AutoCAD Mechanical Desktop:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Architectural Desktop:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Building Systems:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

AutoCAD Mechanical:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Note:

Course Overview

The latest applicable service packs must be used for all of the above products.


Dec‐09

Installing the Training Project

ProjectWise ed Versions

Bentley ProjectWise V8 08.11.05

Databases ed

Microsoft Access 2000, 2002, 2003, 2007   SQLServer 2000, 2003, 2005 and MSDE and SQL Server Express   Oracle 9i Release 2, Oracle 10g Release 2, Oracle 11g Release 1

Installing the Training Project This course belongs to a set of AutoPLANT 3D Plant Design core fundamental courses that teach the student how to use the Plant Design tools for modeling and storing valuable project data.   The core set includes the following modular courses:

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

AutoPLANT Project  Fundamentals Introduction to AutoPLANT Specifications AutoPLANT Equipment Fundamentals   AutoPLANT Piping Fundamentals AutoPLANT Drawing Production Fundamentals

The dataset contains a simulated project, designed to be used for both AutoPLANT 2D and 3D core fundamental courses.

Î Exercise 1: Install the Training Project dataset and add the project as a root directory. 1. Make sure all AutoPLANT applications are closed.   2. the dataset file AP_FV8i_EQP.exe.   3. Save the file to your desktop.   4. Double click the file AP_FV8i_EQP.exe. 5. Click Unzip to begin the extraction to the root directory of the C drive (C:\). 6. Click Close.   7. From your Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project .   8. From the File menu click Add Root to display the Browse for Folder dialog.

Dec‐09


Course Overview


Note:

In order for this option to be available in the File menu, you must select something at the primary root level of the navigation tree because you cannot create a project root directory under a project directory.

9. In the Browse For Folder directory, select C:\Bentley Training Project. 10. Click OK to accept the name.    11. Notice the project root folder, C:\ Projects, now appears in the navigation tree at a primary level.

You are now ready to begin your modeling session.

Note:

Course Overview

Additional training on the Project  utility is covered in the AutoPLANT   training courses and in the ONLINE Help.


Dec‐09

Introductory Knowledge

Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let’s define what you already know.   Identify the following statements as either True or False. The answers to each question are provided in detail on the following page.

Questions:    1. Document Manager is used to manage drawing files and data within a project.   ƒ ƒ

True False

2. When the USC coordinates X=0, Y= 0, Z=0. (0,0,0) this is referred to as the World Coordinate System (WCS)

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. You can only access Equipment components from a pull‐down menu. ƒ ƒ

True False

4. In AutoPLANT components placed in a model can be connected to components located in a xRef.

ƒ ƒ

True False

5. WP refers to a coordinate system based on the Global Coordinate System. ƒ ƒ

True False

6. Component graphic display modes enable you to set the color of your monitor. ƒ ƒ

True False

7. When the USC coordinates X=0, Y= 0, Z=0. (0,0,0) this is referred to as the World Coordinate System (WCS)

ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

True False


Course Overview


8. Equipment components are accessed from libraries delivered with the application. ƒ ƒ

True False

9. Associations between components within a model are easily managed in the project database.

ƒ ƒ

True False

10. Equipment Tags are unique and can never be duplicated. ƒ ƒ

True False

11. When placing components, all x,y,z coordinates must be entered in the AutoCAD command line.

ƒ ƒ

Course Overview

True False


Dec‐09


Answers   1. True: Document Manager is a utility application included in AutoPLANT to manage project files. Files accessed from Document Manager can be edited and saved back to the project ensuring integrity of the project data.

2. True: The location where the X, Y and Z axes intersect is called the Origin. At 0,0,0 it is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). When you move from the default location of 0,0,0, it is referred to as the  Coordinate System (UCS).

3. False: AutoPLANT provides both cascading menus and dockable toolbars for easy access to commands, functions and equipment component libraries.

4. True:  Components in one model can be connected to components in a xRef drawing that has been added to the Work Area. No changes are made to the reference drawing.

5. True:  WP is the default Location Point in AutoPLANT. This point is based on the Global coordinates 0,0,0.

6. False:  Setting Component Display Modes in AutoPLANT enable you to view equipment graphics as wireframe, centerline or mesh.

7. True: The location where the X, Y and Z axes intersect is called the Origin. At 0,0,0 it is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). When you move from the default location of 0,0,0, it is referred to as the  Coordinate System (UCS)

8. True: AutoPLANT Equipment is shipped with a comprehensive set components such as pumps and vessels. Once placed, the components can be easily modified to suit your needs.

9. True: Components that are connected to one another in a model are managed throughout the modeling process.

10. True: Each component placed in a drawing has a unique identifier called a Tag.   11. False: AutoPLANT provides two methods for component placement. You may either enter the coordinates or provide a point‐of‐reference for placement. These reference points are referred to as Location Points and can be set up prior to the modeling session.

Dec‐09


Course Overview



Course Overview


Dec‐09

Application Startup Overview   This module discusses the methods for initiating the application startup. You will learn the best method for starting the application to ensure all related models and drawings that belong to a project are stored in the appropriate locations.

Prerequisites   ƒ

There are no prerequisites to the module

Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Learn methods for launching the AutoPLANT application

ƒ

Learn the benefits of launching the applications using Document Manager


Application Startup

AutoPLANT Application Startup

AutoPLANT Application Startup There are multiple ways to launch the AutoPLANT applications.  When working within a project environment, you will find using Document Manager, ensures that all files related to a specific project are saved to the correct location.

Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Start Menu 1. Select All Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Plant Design for AutoCAD. This will start AutoCAD and load the AutoPLANT Plant Design environment.  The AutoPLANT 3D menu and toolbar have been added, providing access to an integrated set of AutoPLANT Plant Design applications and utilities.

2. This example shows how to start the Equipment application.  Click on the Equipment icon on the AutoPLANT toolbar or, click Equipment from the AutoPLANT 3D menu.

3. The Open Project dialog dislays, listing the default Project Root called Bentley Plant V8I Projects that contains the default sample projects installed with AutoPLANT.

4. Selecting a project will launch the application.   Note:

Application Startup

Sample projects are not recommended for production. New projects can easily be created from these sample projects.  The dataset installed for this course includes a Project that has been created specifically for this course.


Dec‐09


Note:

If you have previously selected a project, the system automatically opens to that project.

Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Desktop Icon When AutoPLANT was installed on your workstation, the icon shown here was placed on your desktop.

1. Double click on the icon to open a Windows Explorer dialog showing the contents of the Programs\Bentley\Plant V8I folder in your  profile.

2. Double click on the Plant Design icon shown to the left (your AutoCAD version may be different). AutoCAD and the AutoPLANT design environment will load, displaying the AutoPLANT menu and toolbar.

3. To start an application, either click on the icon on the AutoPLANT toolbar or, select Equipment from the AutoPLANT 3D menu.

4. From the Open Project dialog, select a project to launch the application.

Note:

Dec‐09

You can place shortcuts to any AutoPLANT application on your desktop by selecting the icon with the right mouse button and dragging it to your desktop.  When you drop the icon, you then pick Create Shortcuts Here option in the pop up menu.


Application Startup


Launching AutoPLANT Applications from Document Manager Launching the application from the powerful utility program called Document Manager provides the ability to manage the drawing files and data within the project without additional input from the .

ƒ ƒ ƒ

Files are stored in the correct folders within the project.   New folders are made automatically.    Upon startup, the application automatically opens to the last project accessed.

You will be using Document Manager throughout this course, to manage your drawing files.

1. Double click on the Bentley Plant V8I icon to show the contents of the folder.   2. Double click to open Document Manager.    3. This figure shows the directory structure for the SAMPLE_IMPERIAL project.

4. To load a custom project you would use the File > Open Project function.  More on that later.

Note:

Once you have loaded a project, Document Manager will default to that project.

You can launch AutoCAD and the AutoPLANT applications from within an existing project when you choose to create a new file or to edit an existing file.

Application Startup


Dec‐09


To create a new equipment model    1. Click the AutoPLANT Equipment directory as shown below. 2. Right click to display the context menu and click New.

3. Both AutoCAD and AutoPLANT will launch. 4. Once you have created a model, you can use the Edit function in the same way to launch the applications.

5. Once the application has loaded, select AutoPLANT Equipment from the pull down AutoPLANT 3D menu.

Note:

Dec‐09

Use this same method to launch the any of the installed AutoPLANT applications.


Application Startup


To Open a Project 1. From Document Manager click File > Open Project.    The Open Project dialog will appear allowing you to browse for a specific project.

2. The figure below shows the Training project.   Notice there are two P&ID drawings already in this project. Clicking on the drawing will display the properties in the right field.

3. Refer to the ON LINE help for additional functionality of Document Manager. Note:

At some point, Document Manager may alert you that VoloView is not loaded.  VoloView is an AutoCAD add‐on that is used for the Document View tab of Document Manager.

Document Manager is used throughout this course, to manage drawing files.   You are now ready to begin this course.

Application Startup


Dec‐09

Equipment Model Setup Overview   The objective of this module is to teach you how to setup the modeling environment for the Equipment model.  You will learn to use Document Manager for starting the application to ensure all related models and drawing in a project are stored in the appropriate location. You will learn to set up the Equipment interface, and become familiar with the component menus and toolbars. You will learn how to set the drawing preferences that determine how relationships between components are created and stored within the shared project database.

Prerequisites   ƒ

Students should be familiar with the AutoPLANT project directory structure created when using the Project  utility, delivered with the AutoPLANT product.

Objectives

Mar‐10

ƒ

Learn  how to launch  the AutoPLANT Equipment application using Document Manager

ƒ

Learn how to load and dock the toolbars required for component placement

ƒ

Set the drawing preferences for the modeling environment

ƒ

Define a new LineNumber in the Preferences Control



Creating a New Equipment Model

Creating a New Equipment Model Document Manager will be used during this course to manage your project files. Refer to steps outlined above for using Document Manager.   The Equipment model you create will be automatically added to a pre‐defined project that has been installed with the dataset.

Î Exercise 1: Use Document Manager to launch the application.   1. Open Document Manager from the Bentley Plant V8i icon. Note:

If this is the first time Document Manager has been used on your workstation the Open Project dialog will list the default Project Root Bentley Plant V8I Projects containing the sample projects as shown. Once you begin working in a project, Document Manager will automatically open to your current project.

2. Select File > Open Project.

3. Double click the Bentley Training Projects folder, to display the Training project in the Project List window.



Dec‐09


4. Select the Training project.   Note:

This project has been created using Imperial Units.

5. Click OK. Your Document Manager now opens to the Training Project.

6. Take a moment now to tour the Document Manager interface.   Note:

Since this project was created for both AutoPLANT 2D and 3D fundamental courses you will see P&ID drawings included.

7. Selecting one of the P&ID drawings, shows the properties in the right Window.    You can also see a preview of the document when you select the Document View tab. Dec‐09




Now let’s begin the modeling process.

Î Exercise 2: From Document Manager, create a new equipment document. 1. From the document list, select AutoPLANT Equipment . 2. From the Documents menu select New or use the right‐click pop up menu.

3. In the New Document dialog enter:   File Name:  Equipment



Dec‐09


Name:  Equipment Description:  Training Equipment Model

Note:

The path to the documents in the location field is managed by Document Manager.

The Create, Record Only, and Reserve buttons are disabled until you select the type of document you want to create.

4. Click AutoPLANT Equipment.

5. Click Create to start AutoCAD and load the AutoPLANT menu and toolbar. 6. Click the Equipment icon on the AutoPLANT toolbar or click Equipment from the AutoPLANT 3D menu. The Model Setup dialog displays.

The Model Setup dialog indicates the project name and units you have selected and enables you to define the direction for North, the dimensions for the model and origin of the model. By default, North is set to 90° to match AutoCAD.

Dec‐09




The origin coordinates (x, y and z) indicate your plant model’s origin. When set to 0,0,0 it is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). When the coordinates move from the default location, it is referred to as the  Coordinate System (USC).

Note:

A detailed description of the Model Setup dialog can be found in Equipment > Help > Getting Started > Model Setup of the online help.

7. In the Model Setup dialog, enter the parameters provided in the table below. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

North

90

90

90

World Length

100’

30000

30000

World Width

60’

18000

18000

Origin X, Y, Z

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Insert North Arrow

OFF

OFF

OFF

Draw Limits Box

OFF

OFF

OFF

8. Click Done. 9. Click File > Save to save your model. Note:

You may be prompted to .  Names and s are usually managed by a Project .  If you have not been given this information, enter Supervisor for both  Name and .



Dec‐09


Deleting Documents Once you create a document within a project, a new entry is made to the registry. To delete document files from a project you should use the functionality of Document Manager following these steps.

1. From Document Manager, first select the document you want to delete. 2. Right click to display the context menu and select Delete.

3. Check Delete from  box.

It is a good practice to manage all files with the Document Manager interface, to ensure drawings are saved to the correct locations and that data integrity is not compromised.

Dec‐09




Save Command ƒ

The Save command automatically saves a file either back to where you retrieved it or where you last saved it.

ƒ

When you Save the same file a second time, AutoCAD replaces the old file with the new file and renames the old version of the file with a .bak extension in place of .dwg.

ƒ

The back up file can be retained until you wish to delete the file. Only one back up file is stored. Backup files can be opened once you have renamed the extension to .dwg. Be sure to give the back up file a new name to avoid overwriting any existing files.

Save As Command ƒ

Using Save As will pause and allow you to choose where you want to store a file.

Reopening Your Model from Document Manager The preferred method for re‐opening your model after you exit AutoPLANT is from Document Manager. This practice helps you become familiar with using Document Manager to manage all project drawings. After exiting AutoPLANT, you can re‐open your model by this method:

1. Select Programs\Bentley\Plant V8I Select Bentley\Document Manager. 2. Select the Equipment drawing from the Document Window.   3. Select Edit from the Documents menu or the right mouse click pop up menu.  You will need to load the Equipment application after AutoCAD starts up and AutoPLANT is loaded.

Note:

Using Document Manager is the safest method to open your current drawing files, to ensure all files are saved to the correct location.



Dec‐09

Touring the Interface

Touring the Interface The easy to use interface provides both dropdown menus and dockable toolbars for accessing Equipment functions and placement options.

Equipment Menu The Equipment menu, as shown above, is a cascading style menu, containing commands and functions used in equipment model design.   The  can access all Equipment commands such as preferences, equipment placement commands and Online Help. Most menu options have a corresponding toolbar – all of which can be opened from the Toolbars menu and positioned on the desktop.

Dec‐09




Toolbars and Tooltips AutoPLANT Equipment toolbars provide you with another means for executing commands and functions.   Many toolbars contain multiple, related, toolbars with flyouts.    A flyout toolbar is indicated with a small triangle in the lower right corner of a toolbar button.  The last command executed from a flyout will become the default command on the primary toolbar.   To view the command that will be executed by a specific toolbar button, position the cursor over the button and pause. A tool tip description will appear.

Note:


Throughout this course, the menu command sequence required to execute a command is defined in the text. Once you become familiar with toolbars, you may find them more expedient.


Dec‐09


Î Exercise 1:  Load the Equipment toolbars.   1. Equipment > Toolbars > Equipment Functions Main.

Equipment Functions include the Equipment setup tools as well as database and reporting functions.

2. Equipment > Toolbars > Equipment Main.

This toolbar allows you to place any equipment class – as well as their associated components – with the click of a button.

3. Equipment > Toolbars > Nozzles Main.

This toolbar gives you access to all nozzle types.

4. Equipment > Toolbars > Functions Individual > Equipment Tools.

Along with view and setting options, the Equipment Tools toolbar gives you quick access to the Edit, Copy, and Delete Component commands.

5. Now take a moment to tour the interface.   6. Click Save.   Toolbars and customization to the interface will remain in effect until you remove them.

Dec‐09



Drawing Preferences

Drawing Preferences The drawing preferences you select for a new model affect the drawing layers and components as they are being placed.

When choosing Equipment Layer Mode, you can select By Type or By Tag.  The default setting, By Type, assumes that your Project  has defined the AutoCAD settings, such as layer and color for each equipment type.

Note:

In this course no AutoCAD settings have been preset.  Therefore all equipment will be modeled on the current AutoCAD layer using the current color.

Î Exercise 1:  Set the drawing preferences for your equipment model. 1. Click Equipment > Setup > Drawing Preferences to open the Drawing Preferences dialog as shown above.

2. Enter your settings to match those as shown in the dialog above.     3. Click OK. 4. Click File > Save to save the preferences to your new model.



Dec‐09

Component Preferences

Component Preferences When a component is placed in a model, a relationship is formed between components existing in the same model or in other models included in the project. The AutoPLANT Equipment application manages these relationships by asg specific values to a Project Object. The only Project Object in AutoPLANT Equipment is the LineNumber.  Relationships are formed between the nozzle connections on equipment and the connected pipe run.    Prior to creating a model, the Project  will create a list of LineNumbers. Each line number will be defined with unique values. All components that are placed using a specific LineNumber value will form a relationship. Once the model is complete, these relationships are used for creating reports, Bills of Materials or for selecting groups of components for editing.   The image here shows relationships formed with the LineNumber, in the AutoPLANT P&ID drawing.  Run numbers refer to process lines in the P&ID. These same line numbers may be used to connect equipment components and pipe segments.

Note:

All Line Numbers listed in the Component Preferences control were created for the Training project installed at the beginning of this course.

Note:

Dec‐09

Relationship values are defined by the Relationship Manager. This tool is typically used by a Project  and will not be covered in this course.




When working in the Equipment application the control is set to display the component preferences used by the Equipment Application – the LineNumber.    With the Nozzle option selected, the LineNumber preference displayed allows you to assign line numbers to the nozzles placed during Equipment modeling. Additional features of the Component Preferences control and how it is used is covered in the AutoPLANT Piping Fundamentals training course.

Note:

For detailed information on the Component Preferences control go to AutoPLANT EQUIPMENT Help > Command Reference > Setup Menu > Component Preferences > Component Preferences.

For easy access, the Component Preferences control can be docked on the left, top or bottom of your AutoCAD window.  Floating or docking on the left, allows you to add, edit, and delete Project Object values.

If the control is docked at the top or bottom of the window, it is displayed in mini‐bar mode and only allows the selection of available values.



Dec‐09


Adding a New Line Number   In the following exercise you will add a new LineNumber called TRIM to the Component Preferences control.

Note:

This LineNumber will be used for a set of nozzles that will be placed on a vessel that will not be connected to a pipe run.

Î Exercise 1:  Add a new line number to the Component Preferences control. 1. Click Equipment > Setup > Component Preferences to open the control.   2. Make sure the Nozzle option is selected from the drop‐down in the Component Preferences list.

3. Right click on the Line Number field in the Preferences section and select Add from the context menu.

4. When the Create New Line Number dialog opens, type TRIM in the Create new Line Number field.

Dec‐09




5. Click OK. The TRIM line number is added to the project database.

6. Dock the Component Preference control in mini bar mode at the top of the application window.

Note:

As you begin your modeling sessions, you will begin to understand how the Component Preferences control is utilized.




Dec‐09

Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed the module, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions: Answer the following questions to be True or False. Detailed answers appear on the following page.

1. After you have completed a drawing, it is important to save your work using either the Save or Save As command.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Document Manager will make additional file folders when none exist. ƒ ƒ

True False

3. LineNumber is an example of a Project Object.   ƒ ƒ

True False

4. New LineNumber values can be added to the Component Preferences control at any time, by anyone.

ƒ ƒ

True False



Dec‐09



Summary

Answers 1. True: Both commands can be used. The Save command automatically saves a file either back to where you retrieved it or where you last saved it. Save As will pause and allow you to choose where you want to store the file.

2. True: Document Manager manages all files within a project and will automatically make new folders where none exist.

3. True: The Project Object in AutoPLANT Equipment is called LineNumber whose values are typically defined by the Project . All components that share the same LineNumber value will create a relationship within the current drawing or across multiple drawings belonging to the same project.

4. True: Although it is easy to add a new LineNumber value to the Component Preferences control, this task is usually performed by the Project  to ensure consistency across all drawings that belong to the same project.


ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Launch AutoPLANT Equipment, and use Document Manager to manage files   Learn how to load and dock the toolbars required for component placement Set the drawing preferences for the new model Define a new LineNumber in the Preferences Control



Dec‐09

Work Areas Overview   When modeling within a collaborative work environment, it is imperative that all disciplines work together to ensure a cohesive design environment.  AutoPLANT provides an enhanced solution to assist in the ease of collaborative design through the creation of a Work Area.   By referencing models from other disciplines, the designer can ensure that physical clashes between designs do not occur.    By creating a Work Area, all Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Piping, Electrical, Instrumentation and other disciplines can collaborate on the complete design of the plant model.

Prerequisites   ƒ

The student should possess a basic understanding of the AutoCAD xref command.

Objectives   ƒ ƒ ƒ

Create a Work Area   Add reference drawings to the Work Area Define a set of reference location points



Dec‐09


Work Areas

What is a Work Area?

What is a Work Area? Work areas define a geographical area within a plant environment.  Plants limits are usually comprised of areas which are subdivided into units depending on the size and constructability of the area.    When modeling within a collaborative work environment, it is imperative that all disciplines work together to ensure a cohesive design environment.  Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Piping, Electrical, Instrumentation and other discipline design files make up the complete design of the plant model. For this reason, disciplines looking to complete their design must reference models from other disciplines to ensure that physical clashes between designs do not occur.  Bentley has provided an enhanced solution to assist in the ease of design through “Work Areas”. “Work areas” can be stored as text files (rwa files) or can be stored in the project database.   The RWA file or database table stores the reference files that are contained within a geographical area of a plant boundary as well as the insertion origin and rotation angle of the design file.    In the graphic below, the plant is defined by the outer boundary.  Within the plant limits, five geographical areas have been defined as Area 100 through Area 500.

Work Areas


Dec‐09

What is a Work Area?

Prior to modeling the equipment and piping, as shown in Area 100, you will create a Work Area.  As each model is created it will become a member of the Work Area.

This .rwa file is comprised of xref drawings from all disciplines.  Reference drawings are linked to the current drawing using AutoCAD’s Xref/Overlay command.   Once the Work Area has been defined, equipment components are placed in your current model by “connecting to” the components located in a reference drawing.    It is important to note, that no changes are made to a reference drawing.  When placing a new component in a current drawing session, the connecting component picks up the intelligence from the component in the reference drawing , thus ensuring accurate placement and connectivity.   Work Areas can be created by discipline, geography, or even process units.  How a project will be broken up into specific Work Areas is the decision of those involved in the design process. The figure above includes piping segments connected to equipment. Other reference drawings such as structural pipe racks and concrete foundations included in a Work Area, make placing components by reference an efficient modeling method.

Dec‐09


Work Areas

Creating a Work Area

Creating a Work Area Several design files from other disciplines have been included in the project dataset.  These drawings are used as reference drawings and are  of the Work Area. The following dialog shows the options that are available during the setup procedure.

When you add a drawing to a Work Area, the drawing is highlighted in the Reference Drawings list and the parameter fields become active, enabling you to define the insertion coordinates and rotation of the referenced drawing.   At any time, you can remove an unwanted drawing from the Work Area.

Note:

Work Areas

A drawing’s insertion point defines the offset of the drawing’s placement point from the model’s origin.  As all project drawings should be using plant coordinates, a Work Area Insertion Point should always be 0, 0, 0.


Dec‐09


Asg Drawing Member Status The options in the hip Status area of the dialog determine the relationship between your current drawing and the files listed in the Work Area.

ƒ

Guest status allows you to compare your drawing to others in the Work Area but prevents other s of the Work Area from seeing your drawing.

ƒ

Member status allows you to see other drawings in the Work Area as well as include your drawing in the Reference Drawings list for other s to view. Other s will NOT be able to edit your drawing, only view it in relation to the other drawings.

ƒ

Non‐member status gives you access to Work Area views without loading the referenced files or including your drawing in the Work Area.  Work Area views are covered in the Drawing Production training module.

You will only have full read/write access to the drawing that is currently open in your application. All other drawings in the Work Area are xref/Overlayed to the current drawing and are READ‐ONLY.  While you will have the ability to place components in your current drawing that are connected to components in the xref drawings, and access their data, you may not insert into or edit any components in the xref drawing.   A common example of this function is to build a piping model by attaching the pipe runs to the nozzles of vessels located in an Equipment model.

Î Exercise 1:  Create a Work Area using the Work Area Setup dialog and add the drawings supplied with your dataset.    If you have exited AutoPLANT, start the Equipment application using Document Manager and open your equipment.dwg file.

1. Click Equipment > Drawing Production > Work Area Setup to open the Work Area Setup dialog.

Dec‐09


Work Areas


2. Click New to create a new Work Area file.   3. In the Windows file selection dialog navigate to a location for storing the Work Area file. The Bentley Training Project > Training directory is a convenient location.

4. Name the file Area100.rwa   5. Click Save to return to the Work Area Setup dialog. 6. In the Title field, type Area 100. 7. To add your drawing to the Reference Drawings list, click the Member option to assign the drawing Member status.

Note:

The hip Status only reflects the status of your current drawing within the Work Area, regardless of which drawing is highlighted in the Reference Drawings list.

8. Accept the default origin point by clicking Save. 9. From the Reference Drawings area click Add. 10. Navigate to the Supplemental directory installed with the dataset.    11. While holding down the Ctrl key, select both At_Found.dwg and At_Steel.dwg.   12. Click Open to add the drawings to the Reference Drawings list.    13. Click Save to update the Work Area. 14. Click Done to close the dialog. 15. Zoom Extents to display the xref drawings included in the Work Area.

Work Areas


Dec‐09

Location Points

Location Points Location Points are saved reference points.  Equipment components that are placed using a location point will build a dynamic relationship with that point.  Whenever you modify a location point, AutoPLANT will automatically update the drawing.

All location points are defined in the Add Location Point dialog by specifying the North/South and East/West distance from a pre‐defined reference point. You will also specify the elevation of the point.

Dec‐09


Work Areas

Location Points

Once defined, you can change the attributes except the name using the Edit Location Point dialog.  The Name field will be disabled.

WP Point As installed, AutoPLANT provides one Location Point.  That point is named WP and defined in global coordinates as (0,0,0).  The WP point is intended to act as the origin of your plant but can be changed to any coordinates. Typically the first location point is placed with respect to the WP point. Since the WP point is the only one defined in global coordinates, the Edit Location Point dialog is different than the other location points.  You must enter global distances in North/South and East/West.

Work Areas


Dec‐09

Location Points

Î Exercise 3: Define the location points listed in the table below. The first location point defined, represents the lower left corner of the building included in the AT_STEEL.dwg.  Location Points will be used for component placement during the modeling session.

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Location Points.   Note:

only the default location point, WP, is defined. This is the default system working point, which is initially defined at the coordinates (0,0,0).

2. Click Add to open the Add Location Point dialog. Note:

The name and description entered will be included in the Location Point list.

3. Enter the following points: Imperial Location Point Definitions Name

Description

North/South

Reference

East/West

Reference

Elevation

PROJECT

Corner of Building

1000’

WP

1000’

WP

100’

E‐106

Feed Effluent Exchanger

25'‐10"

PROJECT

71'‐5"

PROJECT

107'

P‐104

Main Pump

30'‐6"

PROJECT

1019'‐0"

WP

103'

Metric Location Point Definitions Name

Description

North/South

Reference

East/West

Reference

Elevation

PROJECT

Corner of Building

300000

WP

300000

WP

30000

E‐106


7925

PROJECT

21875

PROJECT

32100

P‐104

Main Pump

9144

PROJECT

305700

WP

30900

Mixed Metric Location Point Definitions Name

Description

North/South

Reference

East/West

Reference

Elevation

PROJECT

Corner of Building

300000

WP

300000

WP

30000

E‐106


7925

PROJECT

21875

PROJECT

32100

P‐104

Main Pump

9144

PROJECT

305700

WP

30900

Dec‐09


Work Areas

Location Points

4. Click Close when done.  These points will be used later to place the equipment components.

5. From the Equipment menu select Equipment > Setup > Drawing Preferences.   6. Click the Use Location Point option.   7. Click OK.    AutoPLANT will display the Location Point List whenever you place equipment components.

Note:

You can manually override the Location Point List dialog by pressing Esc, or clicking the X button, when it displays during a component placement operation.

8. Save your model.

Work Areas


Dec‐09

Display Modes

Display Modes Equipment component graphics are constructed from multiple AutoPLANT custom 3D objects by the component drawing script functions.

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Wireframe Wireframe w/Centerline Mesh Centerline (not shown) Wireframe

Wireframe w/Centerline

Mesh

Î Exercise 1: Set your graphic preferences.    1. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Graphic Preferences.   The AutoCAD Options dialog displays.

2. With the PDW Graphics tab active, set to Wireframe w/Centerline mode as shown below.

Note:

For mesh to display properly, you must set the Surface Resolution in the Drawing Preferences dialog to the desired setting before placing components.

Dec‐09


Work Areas

Display Modes

3. Click Save.   You have now completed this module.

Work Areas


Dec‐09

Module Review



1. Work Areas enable you to access and edit drawings from other disciplines. ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Defining a Location Point with reference to another component in the model creates a dynamic relationship between the components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. A model shown in Wireframe Display mode will show all lines in your drawing including the internal features.

ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

True False


Work Areas

Summary

Answers 1. False:  Work Areas enable you to access the intelligence within drawings added to a Work Area.  Only your current drawing can be edited. All referenced drawings are READ ONLY.

2. True: When Location Points are defined in relation to the coordinates of another component in the model, the resulting relationship enables you to modify one location point which automatically updates the position of related component.

3. True: Wireframe Display mode will show all lines including lines representing internal objects.  If the drawing becomes to confusing, switching to Hidden Display will change your model to display only the outside surface, while hiding all internal objects.


ƒ ƒ ƒ

Create a Work Area   Add reference drawings to the Work Area Define a set of reference location points



Work Areas


Dec‐09

Equipment Modeling Overview Equipment models consist of a wide assortment of pumps, horizontal and vertical vessels and heat exchangers. In the following exercises, using the features of the AutoPLANT Equipment application, and the component libraries, you will learn how to model equipment components, including nozzles, platforms and ladders.

Prerequisites ƒ

You must first complete the module on Model Setup before continuing with this module.

Objectives   ƒ

Model a pump with suction and discharge nozzles

ƒ

Model a horizontal vessel with radial and axial nozzles

ƒ

Model and edit a vertical vessel

ƒ

Model a heat exchanger with inlet and outlet nozzles

ƒ

Use the copy command to create spare components

ƒ

Create custom components

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Equipment Menu

Equipment Menu The Equipment menu includes a wide assortment of components.  These components are classified as either EQUIP or ASSOC components. By definition, this means that the component can either exist alone in a drawing or it must be “associated” with an existing component already placed in the drawing.  Both types of components can be easily modified. EQUIP type components can exist independently of other components. These include all of the equipment components in both the Equipment and Equipment Primitives menus, with the exception for the components that are added to vessels.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Equipment Menu

ASSOC type components, must be attached to an existing component to form an association. These include the components in the Nozzles, Structures and Associative Primitives menus. Prior to placing an ASSOC type component, you will be prompted to select the existing component it will be attached to. You will specify dimension and position parameters that allow you to place the associated component with respect to the selected component's reference point.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Modeling Equipment Components

Modeling Equipment Components   Equipment components are placed using parametric information from the external database specifications. This placement method provides the  with a set of intuitive dialogs and prompts for easily defining all materials, dimensions and placement parameters. Once placed, components are easily edited making sure that all data in the external database is accurate.   There are four basic steps for placing components:

1. Select the component from a drop‐down menu or toolbar.

2. Create a unique tag for the component by completing this dialog.

Each component placed in a drawing has a unique identifier, or tag stored in an external database.  If you attempt to assign a tag number that already exists in the database, a warning will ask you to either define a new number or specify that a second item will use the same tag number. If the same tag number is used, a link to the original tag number definition is created.   An equipment tag is a combination of the equipment type and a number in the format of ‐ .  There are no restrictions on the form or content of either the type or number, but there must be a value for each. Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


For this course, you can either enter the full equipment tag number in the Create new Equipment tag field, or in the type (Typ) and number (Num) fields. The remaining fields in this dialog are discussed in the AutoPLANT  training course.  Access the Online help for additional information.

3. Define the parameters. Once you enter a name for the tag a dialog opens enabling you to modify the default values that populate each field.  As you move the curser over a field, a descriptive prompt displays at the bottom of the dialog.

Note:

The placement point for a component is indicated by a magenta circle in the graphic display.

Once complete you will click OK.   Now that you have defined what your pump will look like you must specify where to place the new component.

4. There are two methods for placing equipment components, by a predefined point, or be entering the coordinates at the command line.   A variation of both methods can also be used, as noted below.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Placing Components By Location Point In a previous exercise, you defined three location points and set the Use Location Point switch in the Drawing Preferences dialog.

The following steps illustrate the command prompts that appear when you use this method.

1. Select the desired point from the Location Point List dialog that opens after the equipment parameters have been entered.

2. Click Enter at the AutoCAD prompt for elevation: Elevation to equipment reference / pick elevation point <0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000>:

3. Click Enter at the AutoCAD prompt for XY location: Elevation entered: 0.000000 Enter or pick XY location (Polar/North-east) <0.000000,0.000000>:

4. Enter the angle for the equipment rotation: Enter direction angle or pick point <0.0>:

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Placement By Entering Coordinates You can also use a Location Point as a reference point, and then enter the offset values at each prompt.  When entering values, you may find it easier to switch to Elevation for the change in Z value and to Polar or North‐east for the horizontal offset value. If you are prompted to pick a predefined Location Point, but would rather enter coordinate values for the equipment placement you can:

1. Escape (Esc) out of the Location Point List dialog if you have the Use Location Points setting turned on.

2. Provide an elevation at the prompt: Elevation to equipment reference / pick elevation point <0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000>:

Pick either a value of 0,0, , or E followed by an elevation value. Enter elevation distance <0.0>:

3. Provide horizontal placement: Enter or pick XY location (Polar/North-east) <0.000000,0.000000>:

Enter a value of X, Y, or P followed by a polar distance followed by an angle: Enter distance <0.0>: Enter angle (degrees) <0.0>:

Or Enter N, followed by a north value, followed by an east value: Enter north (- for south) distance <0.0>: Enter east (- for west) distance <0.0>:

4. Enter the angle of the equipment rotation: Enter direction angle or pick point <0.0>:

Editing Components

To edit a component already in your drawing, use Equipment > Equipment Tools > Edit Component to open the editor dialog for the component, and change the attribute values.   Once changes are made, the component will be redrawn and the external drawing database record will be updated with the new values.

Note:

Jan‐08

You can also double click on the component to activate the Edit Component dialog.


Equipment Modeling


Deleting Components

There are three ways to delete a component from a drawing. All methods will delete the component graphics from the drawing.

1. Use the Equipment Tools > Delete Component command.    This method is recommended to ensure that all component graphics and the links to the database are deleted.    However if you wish to delete a component including all attachments such as the nozzles, you may file it easier to used these methods.

2. Select the component and use the Delete key. 3. Use the AutoCAD Erase command.   Note:

Equipment Modeling

It is always a good idea to use the Clean Database command, to ensure all deleted component records have been removed from the database.


Dec‐08

Nozzle Placement

Nozzle Placement Nozzles are the most common example of an associative component.  As shown below, there are many types of nozzles that can be modeled with AutoPLANT Equipment.  The most widely used are the radial and axial nozzles.      Radial Nozzle

Radial Elbow Nozzle Tangential Radial Nozzle on Radial Nozzle

Radial Nozzle on Vapor Column and Boots

Tangential Axial Nozzle

Radial Nozzle on Axial Nozzle Tangential Radial Nozzle Nozzles on Pumps Axial Nozzle on Vapor Columns and Boots

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Nozzle Placement

Radial Nozzles Radial nozzles are attached to the wall of cylindrical component, and positioned at a measured distance from a central axis.

A Equipment Placement point to nozzle centerline B Nozzle projection from equipment surface C Looking from the direction of equipment orientation, clockwise angle rotation   D Offset distance from equipment component centerline

Line No.   Notice the Line No. above is set to TRIM.  This is the same setting in your Preference Control dialog that is docked in your window. While placing the nozzle you have the option of using the browse button to select a different line number.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Nozzle Placement

Axial Nozzles Axial Nozzles extend in a direction that is perpendicular to the plane of the cylindrical structure.

A Nozzle projection from equipment surface B Offset in Y direction C Offset in X direction

Note:

When placing axial nozzles, select a location on the end of the equipment that is closest to where the nozzle will be placed.

You will also have the option of selecting a different Line No.

Miscellaneous Nozzle Types Several nozzle types will be used in this course, including:

ƒ ƒ ƒ

Pump nozzles Axial and radial manways Elbow nozzles

You are not required to use only specialized nozzle types.  For example, you can place a radial nozzle on a pump if the standard pump nozzles do not meet your needs.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Modeling Pumps

Modeling Pumps In this exercise you will model a pump complete with suction and discharge nozzles.

Î Exercise 1: Create a pump with the parameters listed below, positioning the pump using the P‐104 location point.

1. Select Equipment > Pumps >Horizontal Pump.   2. In the Create New Equipment tag dialog, enter P‐104 as the tag.

3. Click OK.   4. Enter the pump parameters as shown.

Note:

Equipment Modeling

Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

A

10’ 6”

3150

3150

B

4’ 6”

1350

1350

C

1’

300

300

D

10”

250

250

E

3’

900

900

F

1’

300

300

G

2’ 6”

750

750

H

1’ 6”

450

450

I

4’ 8”

1400

1400

J

3’ 4”

1000

1000

K

10”

250

250

L

9’

2700

2700

M

0”

0

0

The Prompt field at the bottom of the dialog provides a brief description of the current field.


Dec‐08

Modeling Pumps

5. Click OK. Since you have enabled the Use Location Point functionality in the Drawing Preferences dialog, the Location Point List opens.  Select the desired location point.

6. Select location point P‐104. Respond to the prompts: Elevation to equipment reference / pick elevation point <0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000>:

7. Click Enter. Elevation entered: 0.000000 Enter or pick XY location (Polar/North-east) <0.000000,0.000000>:

8. Click Enter. Enter direction angle or pick point <0.0>:

9. At the command line, enter 180, click Enter.   10. Click File > Save. A message in the AutoCAD command line indicates one new equipment component has been added to the project database.   Saving database for C:\Projects\Training\AT_EQP\eq-module... 1 3D Equipment Data Components added to the project.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Modeling Pumps

Changing Preference Control Settings In a previous exercise you added a new LineNumber to the control called TRIM. This line number is not used to place a pump. But before we add a nozzle to the pump, let’s change the settings on the Component Preferences control to illustrate how the control is used during the modeling session.

Î Exercise 2: Change the Preference Control Setting to LineNumber L1004.   1. If the control is docked in mini‐bar mode, drag the control to the center of the window to access the editing functions.

Note:

Both AutoPLANT Equipment and Piping use the same Component Preference control, although Equipment only uses the control for connections to pipe runs.

2. Make sure the control is set to Nozzle using the drop down menu. 3. Set the LineNumber to L1004 using the drop down menu.   Note:

The list of Line Numbers defined for this project appears in the list.

4. When done, either dock the control in mini‐bar mode or to the left of your screen as shown.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Modeling Pumps

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Modeling Pumps

Add a Suction Nozzle Î Exercise 2: Attach a suction nozzle to Pump P‐104 1. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Pumps > Suction Nozzle. A nozzle is an “associative component”. You are automatically prompted to select the reference component.

2. Pick pump P‐104 to open the Create new Nozzle tag dialog. Note:

If the pump is not selected the command will cancel.

The default tag includes the pump equipment tag (P‐104) with a N1 suffix. Each time a nozzle is placed on a piece of equipment, the numeric code value automatically increments to the next available number.

3. Click OK to accept the default tag value and open the Pump Suction Nozzle dialog.   4. Define the nozzle parameters as listed below. Note:

No value for Insulation thickness. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Spec

I_150LB

I_150LB

I_150LB

Nom. Size

6

150

6

A

1’

300

300

B

0

0

0

C

0

0

0

Line No.

L1004

L1004

L1004

Rating

150LB

150LB

150LB

Facing

RF

RF

RF

End Cond.

FL

FL

FL

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Modeling Pumps

5. Now notice that the Line Number is already set in the dialog.    This is a faster and more accurate method for placing nozzles when you already know the Line Number.

Note:

You can override the preset number by selecting a new number using the browse button.

6. For this exercise, it is not necessary to change the Line Number.   7. The Rating, Facing and End Condition for the nozzle at the bottom of the Nozzle dialog.   If these values are not set in your dialog as shown above, you can select the correct nozzle from the spec by re‐entering the Nom. Size parameter.   The Specification Selection dialog displays:

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Modeling Pumps

8. Select the desired nozzle from the spec matching the listed criteria Rating, Facing and End Condition.

9. Once all of the information is defined, click OK to place the nozzle.

Add a Discharge Nozzle Î Exercise 3: Attach a discharge nozzle to Pump P‐104 In the next exercise you will override the Line Number listed in the Component Preferences control.

1. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Pumps > Discharge Nozzle. 2. Pick pump P‐104 to form the association.   The default tag number appears as P‐104‐N2. The N2 suffix represents the code for the nozzle associated with pump P‐104.

3. Click OK.   4. Define the nozzle parameters as listed below.  to select a new line number by using the Browse feature next to the Line No. field.

Equipment Modeling

Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nom. Size

4

100

4

A

2’

600

600

B

0

0

0

C

0

0

0

Line No.

L1005

L1005

L1005

Rating

150LB

150LB

150LB

Facing

RF

RF

RF

End Cond.

FL

FL

FL


Dec‐08

Modeling Horizontal Vessels

5. Click OK to place the nozzle to complete the pump.

Modeling Horizontal Vessels   Î Exercise 1:  Create a vessel with the parameters as given, positioning it on top of foundations situated next to pump P‐104.

1. Select Equipment > Vessels > Horizontal Vessel. The Tag Types dialog opens.

2. Select Drum Tag and click OK. 3. The Create New Equipment Tag dialog displays. 4. Enter VH‐45 into the Create new Equipment tag field.    5. Click OK. 6. Enter the vessel parameters shown below.   Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

A

16’ 8”

5000

5000

B

6’ 8”

2000

2000

C

5’

1500

1500

D

10”

250

250

No. of Sdls

2

2

2

Sdl. Width

5’

1500

1500

E

3’

900

900

F

3’

900

900

Insul Thk

2”

50

50

Head Type

Semi‐Elliptical

Semi‐Elliptical

Semi‐Elliptical

7. Click OK.   8. Since there is no placement point defined for VH‐45, select WP.  (World Coordinate point 0,0,0.) By selecting the WP point, you will now enter the offsets from that point to arrive at your equipment placement point. Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


9. Respond to the AutoCAD prompts as follows: Elevation to equipment reference / pick elevation point <0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000>:

Enter the appropriate coordinates: Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

0,0,109’6”

0,0,32850

0,0,32850

Elevation entered: Enter or pick XY location (Polar/North-east) <0.000000,0.000000>:

10. Enter the appropriate coordinates: Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

1003’10”,1040’

301235,312700

301235,312700

Enter direction angle or pick point <0.0>:

11. Click Enter.   The final position of the vessel should resemble the image below.

Note:

Equipment Modeling

If you are working in AutoCAD 2006 or later, you may have noticed that your coordinate entry appeared on your drawing screen rather than in the command line.  If that is the case, then you have the Dynamic Entry turned on.  If you want to turn off that functionality, click on the DYN button at the bottom of your AutoCAD window.


Dec‐08


Attaching Radial Nozzles In the following exercises you can either reset the Component Preferences control to the desired Line Number or select the Line Number from the dialog.

Î Exercise 2:  Add the following radial nozzles to vessel VH‐45, positioning the nozzle using the parameters listed below.

1. To set up the view, enter TOP at the command line, then ZOOM around the horizontal vessel.

2. Set the Component Preference control for Nozzles and the Line Number to TRIM.   3. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Equipment > Radial. 4. Pick a point on vessel VH‐45.   5. Enter VH‐45‐N1 in the tag field of the Create new Nozzle tag dialog. 6. Click OK. 7. Enter the following nozzle parameters in the placement dialog: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nom. Size

8”

200mm

8”

A

4’

1200

1200

B

9”

225

225

C

0

0

0

D

0”

0

0

Line No.

L1003

L1003

L1003

Rating/Facing/End Conditon

150LB, RF, FL

150LB, RF, FL

150LB, RF, FL

8. Click OK to place the nozzle. 9. Continue entering nozzles as specified in the table shown on the next page. Note:

Jan‐08

The nozzle command is still active, so you only need to select the vessel to continue.


Equipment Modeling


Imperial Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

A Location B Projection

C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Outlet

VH‐45‐N2

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

15’6”

9”

180

0

L1004

Relief

VH‐45‐N3

I_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

1’

9”

0

0

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N4

I_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

15’

1’2”

270

‐2’

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N5

I_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

15’

1’2”

270

2’

TRIM

C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Metric Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


Outlet

VH‐45‐N2

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

4650

225

180

0

L1004

Relief

VH‐45‐N3

M_150LB

50mm 150LB, RF

300

225

0

0

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N4

M_150LB

50mm 150LB, RF

4500

350

270

‐600

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N5

M_150LB

50mm 150LB, RF

4500

350

270

600

TRIM

C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Mixed Metric Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


Outlet

VH‐45‐N2

MM_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

4650

225

180

0

L1004

Relief

VH‐45‐N3

MM_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

300

225

0

0

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N4

MM_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

4500

350

270

‐600

TRIM

Instrument

VH‐45‐N5

MM_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

4500

350

270

600

TRIM

10. When done, click Enter to exit the command.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Attaching Axial Nozzles Î Exercise 3:  Add the following axial nozzles to vessel VH‐45, positioning the nozzle using the parameters listed below.   If necessary, set up the view, by entering TOP at the command line, then Zoom around the horizontal vessel.

1. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Equipment > Axial to add the steam outlet nozzle. 2. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Equipment > Axial Manway to add the manway. Note:

The correct placement of axial nozzles on equipment is dependent upon the end selected when prompted to place a component. Pick the right end of the vessel for the Steam Out nozzle and left end of the vessel for the Manway.    Imperial Axial Nozzles

Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

A Projection

B 1st Offset

C 2ND Offset

Line No.

Steam Outlet

VH‐45‐N6

I_150LB

2” 150LB RF

2’‐2”

‐2’‐6”

0

TRIM

Axial Manway

VH‐45‐MW1

I_150LB

24” 150LB RF

2’‐2”

‐2’

0

TRIM

A Projection

B 1st Offset

C 2ND Offset

Line No.

Metric Axial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Steam Outlet

VH‐45‐N6

MM_150LB

50mm 150LB RF

650

‐750

0

TRIM

Axial Manway

VH‐45‐MW1

M_150LB

600mm 150LB RF

650

‐600

0

TRIM

A Projection

B st 1 Offset

C 2ND Offset

Line No.

Mixed Metric Axial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Steam Outlet

VH‐45‐N6

MM_150LB

2” 150LB RF

650

‐750

0

TRIM

Axial Manway

VH‐45‐MW1

MM_150LB

24” 150LB RF

650

‐600

0

TRIM

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


3. Save your model. 4. From a FRONT view, the horizontal vessel and pump should look like the image shown below.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Modeling Vertical Vessels

Modeling Vertical Vessels In these exercises, you will model a vertical vessel including nozzles and use the editing commands to modify the parameters to update the database records.

Note:

For an unobstructed view of the exchanger, you may want to unload the referenced drawings using AutoCAD’s xref command, or use AutoCAD’s 3D Adjust Clip Planes.

Î Exercise 1:  Create a vertical vessel with the parameters as given, positioning it at a location referenced from a predefined location point.

1. Type Front to move to a front view, and then Zoom Extents. 2. Select Equipment > Vessels > Vertical Vessel. 3. Select Tower Tag from the Tag Type dialog. Click OK. 4. Type T‐136 into the tag field of the Create new Equipment tag dialog.  Click OK. 5. Enter the following parameters in the Vertical Vessel placement dialog.

Jan‐08

Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

A

10’

3000

3000

B

27’

8000

8000

C

6’ 6”

2000

2000

D

10’

3000

3000

E

0

0

0

F

0

0

0

G

0

0

0

H

0

0

0

I

0

0

0

J

0

0

0

Upper Head

Semi‐Elliptical

Semi‐Elliptical

Semi‐Elliptical

Lower Head

No Head

No Head

No Head

Insul Thk

0”

0

0


Equipment Modeling


Note:

Make sure the vessel is placed without a lower head. Later, you will place a lower head using equipment primitives.

6. Click OK. 7. Use the Esc key to exit the Location Point List dialog. 8. Respond to the following prompts: Elevation to equipment reference / pick elevation point <0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000>:

Enter E Enter elevation distance <0.0>:


Metric

Mixed Metric

106’6”

31950

31950

Elevation entered: Enter or pick XY location (Polar/North-east) <0.000000,0.000000>:

Enter N Enter north (- for south) distance <0.0>:


Metric

Mixed Metric

1040’

312000

312000

Enter east (- for west) distance <0.0>:


Metric

Mixed Metric

1058’

317400

317400

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


T‐136 should resemble the figure shown here.

Modify Vessel T‐136 Î Exercise 2:  Use the edit command to remove the skirt from T‐136. 1. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Edit Component. 2. Pick vertical vessel T‐136.   The placement dialog displays the parameter values that were entered when the vessel was originally placed.

3. To remove the vessel skirt, change the value of parameters C and D to 0. 4. Click OK.   5. A message displays indicating that you have removed the skirt from the vessel. 6. Click OK to redraw the vessel.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Add Nozzles to T‐136 Î Exercise 3:  Add a liquid outlet nozzle with a fabricated elbow to the bottom of the vessel.

Note:

When placing axial nozzles, always pick the end of a vessel closest to where you want the nozzle placed. .

1. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Equipment > Elbow > Axial. 2. Pick a point on the shell of tower T‐136 near the bottom of the vessel.    3. Change the tag number to T‐136‐N4 in the Create new Nozzle tag dialog.    4. Click OK. 5. Enter the nozzle parameters in the Axial Elbow Nozzle on Equipment dialog as follows: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nom. Size

8

200mm

8

A

3’ 9”

1150

1150

B

0”

0

0

C

0

0

0

D

2’

600

600

E

270

270

270

Line No.

L1006

L1006

L1006

6. Click OK to place the nozzle. 7. Click Enter to end the command.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Î Exercise 4:  Add the radial and axial nozzles to T‐136.   Your model should resemble the figure.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Imperial Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Inlet

T‐136‐N1

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

18’

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N6

I_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW1

I_150LB

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW2

I_150LB

Note:


C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

6”

225

0

L1002

6”

6”

270

0

TRIM

24” 150LB, RF

2’

9”

0

0

TRIM

24” 150LB, RF

18’

9”

0

0

TRIM

When placing the axial nozzles, be sure to pick a point near the top of the vessel. Imperial Axial Nozzles

Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Vapor   Outlet

T‐136‐N2

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

No Check

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N3

I_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

No Check

B 1st   Offset

C 2nd Offset

Line No.

3’3”

0

0

L1003

3’3”

2’3”

‐1’6”

L1008

Placement A Projection by Angle

Your vessel should resemble the figure shown in both TOP and FRONT views. Metric Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Inlet

T‐136‐N1

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

5400

150

225

0

L1002

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N6

M_150LB

50mm 150LB, RF

150

150

270

0

TRIM

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW1

M_150LB

600mm 150LB, RF

600

250

0

0

TRIM

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW2

M_150LB

600mm 150LB, RF

5400

250

0

0

TRIM

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Metric Axial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Vapor   Outlet

T‐136‐N2

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

Checked Off

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N3

M_150LBa

50mm 150LB, RF

Checked Off

B 1st   Offset

C 2nd Offset

Line No.

1000

0

0

L1003

1000

‐450

675

L1008



Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Inlet

T‐136‐N1

MM_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

5400

150

225

0

L1002

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N6

MM_150LB

2” 150LB, RF

150

150

270

0

TRIM

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW1 MM_150LB

24” 150LB, RF

600

250

0

0

TRIM

Radial Manway

T‐136‐MW2 MM_150LB

24” 150LB, RF

5400

250

0

0

TRIM

B 1st   Offset

C 2nd Offset

Line No.

Mixed Metric Axial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


Vapor   Outlet

T‐136‐N2

MM_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

Checked Off

1000

0

0

L1003

Steam   Outlet

T‐136‐N3

MM_150LBa

2” 150LB, RF

Checked Off

1000

‐450

675

L1008

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Challenge Exercise   Editing Nozzles   Editing the placement of a nozzle is as simple as editing an equipment component. These basic steps are required .

1. Select the Edit Component command and pick the desired nozzle. 2. Enter the new placement attributes. 3. Click OK. Î Exercise 5:  Move the relief nozzle on T‐136 to match the figure shown here.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Modeling Heat Exchangers

Modeling Heat Exchangers The following exercises will reemphasize the placement procedures you have already learned. You will model a horizontal heat exchanger and add inlet and outlet nozzles to the vessel.   When complete, your exchanger should look like the one shown from a front view.

Î Exercise 1:  Create a horizontal heat exchanger E‐106, using the parameters below and place it at the pre‐defined location point with a direction angle of 180°.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

E‐106

E‐106

E‐106

A

12’ 6”

3750

3750

B

4’

1200

1200

C

4’

1200

1200

D

8’

2400

2400

E

4’

1200

1200

Sdl width

3’

900

900

G

8”

200

200

H

1’ 6”

450

450

I

3’

900

900

J

0

0

0

K

0

0

0

L

6”

150

150

M

0

0

0

Insul Thk

0

0

0

Flange Thickness

2”

50

50

Flange Outer Dia.

4’ 4”

1400

1400

Draw Right Flange

ON

ON

ON

Draw Left Flange

ON

ON

ON

Draw Right Head

ON

ON

ON

Draw Left Head

OFF

OFF

OFF

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Adding Nozzles to E‐106 Î Exercise 2:  Add the radial nozzles to the exchanger E‐106. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Equipment > Radial.

Note:

Use the repeat command function to continue placing nozzles. To end the command, click Enter.   Imperial Radial Nozzles

Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Channel   Inlet

E‐106‐N1

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

0

1’

180

0

L1006

Channel   Outlet

E‐106‐N2

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

0

1’

0

0

TRIM

Shell Inlet

E‐106‐N3

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

13’

1’

0

0

TRIM

Shell   Outlet

E‐106‐N4

I_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

2’6”

1’

180

0

L1001

C Orient

D Offset

Line No.

Metric Radial Nozzles Nozzle

Tag

Spec

Size/Rating


Channel   Inlet

E‐106‐N1

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

0

300

180

0

L1006

Channel   Outlet

E‐106‐N2

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

0

300

0

0

TRIM

Shell Inlet

E‐106‐N3

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

3900

300

0

0

TRIM

Shell   Outlet

E‐106‐N4

M_150LB

200mm 150LB, RF

750

300

180

0

L1001

C Orient

D Offset

Line No.


Tag

Spec

Size/Rating

Channel   Inlet

E‐106‐N1

M_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

0

300

180

0

L1006

Channel   Outlet

E‐106‐N2

M_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

0

300

0

0

TRIM

Shell Inlet

E‐106‐N3

M_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

3900

300

0

0

TRIM

Shell   Outlet

E‐106‐N4

M_150LB

8” 150LB, RF

750

300

180

0

L1001

Jan‐08



Equipment Modeling

Associative Components

Associative Components AutoPLANT Equipment component libraries provide a large selection of associative (Assoc) components. The most common is the nozzle, but you can also add boots, ladders, or a variety of different head types as associative components.   As the term implies, these components cannot stand alone in a drawing – they must be “associated” to an existing piece of equipment. While associative components are dependent on other equipment components, they are considered an independent entry in the AutoPLANT database, and must therefore, have a unique tag. When placed, AutoPLANT will automatically generate a unique tag for these components, but as with all components you have the option to modify the tag to suit your requirements. Associative components can be grouped into the following categories:

ƒ

Vessel components – include boots and legs.  These components are located in the Equipment > Vessels menu.

ƒ

Associated primitives – including heads and solids, are traditionally used for foundations and base plates.  Select associated primitives from the Equipment > Associated Primitives menu.

ƒ

Structure components – include ladders, platforms and davits. To add these types of components, select from the Equipment > Structures menu.

Note:

Equipment Modeling

For increased productivity and faster component placement, select the component types from a toolbar rather than a drop down menu.


Dec‐08


Vessel Components In the following exercise, you will add a boot and nozzle to VH‐45.  Your finished vessel should look as shown.

Î Exercise 1:  Add a boot including a nozzle to horizontal vessel VH‐45 using the parameters listed below.

1. Select Equipment > Vessels > Add Boot. 2. Click vessel VH‐45 to open the Boot on Horizontal Vessel dialog. 3. Enter the boot parameters as shown. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

VB‐45

VB‐45

VB‐45

A

11’

3300

3300

B

2’ 6”

750

750

C

2’ 6”

750

750

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


4. Add a radial nozzle, VH‐45‐B1, to the boot.    Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Boots > Radial

5. In the placement dialog, input the following parameters. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

VH‐45‐B1

VH‐45‐B1

VH‐45‐B1

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nom. Size/Rating

2 150LB RF

50 150LB RF

2 150LB RF

A

2’

600

600

B

6”

150

150

C

0

0

0

D

0

0

0

Line No.

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM

6. Add an axial nozzle, VH‐45‐B2 to the boot. Select Equipment > Nozzles > On Boots > Axial.

Note:

Select a location near the bottom of the boot.

7. In the dialog, input the parameters as shown.

Equipment Modeling

Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

VH‐45‐B2

VH‐45‐B2

VH‐45‐B2

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nom. Size/Rating

3”   150LB RF

80mm 150LB RF

3” 150LB RF

A

1’

300

300

B

0

0

0

C

0

0

0

Line No.

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM


Dec‐08


This exercise demonstrates how components such as legs, lugs and heads are attached by creating an association to an existing component.

Î Exercise 2: Add legs to T‐136. 1. Select Equipment > Vessels > Add Legs. 2. Pick a point on vessel T‐136.  (Do not pick a point on the head primitive added in the previous exercise.)

3. Enter the following parameters in the Legs on Vertical Vessel dialog. Note:

When inserting legs, the vessel reference point is based on the vessel's original insertion point as indicated in the prompt description when the cursor is placed in parameter C.    Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

TL‐136

TL‐136

TL‐136

No. Legs

4

4

4

A

45

45

45

B

8’‐9”

2625

2625

C

2’‐3’

675

675

D

10”

250

250

4. Click OK to attach the legs to the vessel as shown.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Associated Primitives In this exercise you will add a primitive component to the vessel.

Î Exercise 1:  Add an elliptical head to the bottom of T‐136. You may find it helpful to change to the FRONT view before performing this exercise.

1. Select Equipment > Associative Primitives > Heads > Elliptical. 2. Pick a point on T‐136 near the bottom of the vessel to indicate the location for the elliptical head.

3. Enter the following parameters in the Associative Elliptical Vessel Head dialog: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

EH‐136

EH‐136

EH‐136

A

10’

3000

3000

Link Diameter

Checked on

Checked on

Checked on

B

2’ 6”

750

750

C

0

0

0

D

0

0

0

4. Check Link Diameter to associate the diameter of the head to the diameter of the vessel.   If the diameter of the vessel is later modified, the diameter of the head will be automatically updated.

5. Click OK to attach the head.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Structural Components AutoPLANT Equipment provides a wide range of structural components including ladders and platforms. These structural components must be attached to an existing component or primitive.

Î Exercise 1:  Create a ladder with the parameters listed below and add to T‐136. 1. Select Equipment > Structures > Ladders > On Vertical Vessels. 2. Pick vertical vessel T‐136 to form the association.    3. Enter the ladder parameters into the placement dialog. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

SU‐329

SU‐329

SU‐329

A

6’

1800

1800

B

0

0

0

C

6’‐6”

1950

1950

D

16’‐6”

4950

4950

E

10”

250

250

F

12”

300

300

G

13’

3900

3900

H

1’‐6”

450

450

I

1”

25

25

Discontinue

No Check

No Check

No Check

4. Click OK to place the ladder.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Î Exercise 2: Add a circular platform to T‐136. 1. Select Equipment > Structures > Circular Platform. 2. Pick vertical vessel T‐136 to form the association and display the placement dialog. 3. Enter the platform parameters. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

SU‐346

SU‐346

SU‐346

A

5’

1500

1500

B

3’

900

900

C

10”

250

250

D

10

10

10

E

135

135

135

F

2”

50

50

G

1’ 8”

500

500

H

10’

3000

3000

4. Click OK. Your finished T‐136 should resemble the example shown.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Copy Component Command

Copy Component Command For multiple instances of an equipment type – especially if the nozzles and other associated components are the same – it can be much faster to create the first component and then copy and place the new component in multiple locations.    The Equipment > Equipment Tools > Copy Component command is used to copy equipment and any associated components. The parameters of the copied component can then be modified.  The component is redrawn and the external database records are updated with the new values.   To maintain unique naming, AutoPLANT uses this simple naming convention for copied equipment: $( ) Since the default format may not meet your naming conventions, you can re‐name them.   Before you can change the name of any component, the component must first be saved to the Equipment database. Should you forget to save, you will be prompted by a Project Database Error.    Three things to  when copying equipment:

1. The AutoCAD copy command works similar to the AutoPLANT copy command.   2. Do not exit the copy command with the Esc key. Doing so results in a duplicate graphic.   The Equipment application does not consider it a component separate from the original.

3. Do not use the Windows command for copy and paste (ctrl+c, ctrl+v). It will only duplicate the graphics selected, while all of the AutoPLANT intelligence will be lost.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Creating a Spare Pump Î Exercise 1:  Create a copy of P‐104 and place the copy in the location specified.   The ISO2 view is more convenient for this exercise.

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Copy Component. 2. Respond to the prompts as follows: Select objects:

Pick any point on Pump P‐104 and then click Enter (this indicates you are done selecting objects to copy). Specify Base point or displacement, or {Multiple}:

Pick any point on the pump. Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:

Type @9'‐3"<270  (or @2775<270 for Metric and Mixed Metric projects) and then click Enter to position the copied pump. The pump and its associated nozzles are copied as shown in the SE isometric view.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


Modify the Tags Î Exercise 2: Modify the new pump tags.   Note:

Before you modify the new pump’s tag numbers you must save the model.

1. Click Save.   2. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Edit Component 3. Select the copied pump to display the placement dialog.   Notice the default tag number includes the original pump tag with additional characters appended at the end.

4. Click Browse next to the tag number field to display the Rename Equipment Tag dialog shown below.

5. Type P‐124 for the new tag name.   6. Click OK. Note:

If a message box prompts for an additional link for P‐124, click Yes.

7. Click OK to close the dialog and save the changed tag to the database.   8. Select the Edit Component command to change the tag number for both pump nozzles. Enter P‐124‐N1 for the suction nozzle and P‐124‐N2 for the discharge nozzle.

9. When complete, click Save.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling


Create a Second Heat Exchanger    The Copy Component command can be used to create a second heat exchanger, similar to the previous exercise for the pump.

Î Exercise 1:  Using the Copy Component command, make a second heat exchanger and position it on top of the original exchanger. You may find this exercise easier if you change to a FRONT view and Zoom in around exchanger E‐106.

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Tools > Copy Component. 2. Select exchanger E‐106. 3. Click Enter.   4. Select a base point of displacement. Pick anywhere on the component. Enter @0,0,6' (or @0,0,1800 for Metric and Mixed Metric projects) for the second point displacement.

5. Save your model. 6. When the Modify Tags dialog displays, change the tag of the new exchanger to E‐107. 7. Use the edit command to change the nozzles on the two exchangers to match those shown in the figure.

8. Save your model.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08


These exercises complete the equipment model. Your finished model including all components and reference drawings should appear similar to the figure shown.

This model will be used during the AutoPLANT Piping course.   The exercises in the following sections are optional.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

Custom Components At times you may need to create a custom component.  AutoPLANT Equipment provides an extensive array of basic shapes, referred to as primitives, for creating custom components.   Primitives are categorized as Equipment Primitives, Associative Primitives or Transition Components.

Equipment Primitives Equipment Primitives act as the parent component to Associative and Transition child components.

When you construct equipment from primitives, the first primitive placed becomes the parent component and is assigned a tag.   You can then attach Associative Primitives or Transition Components to the first Equipment Primitive to complete your custom equipment. An Equipment Primitive cannot be attached to another Equipment Primitive.

Associative Primitives Associative Primitives cannot stand alone and must be attached to an existing component.

Once placed, an Associative Primitive becomes part of the parent primitive and is resized or relocated with the parent primitive.

Transition Components Transition Components are associative primitives that allow you to create a smooth connection between dissimilar components.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Custom Components

Building Custom Components Custom equipment can be simple with a few components, or detailed including equipment primitives, associative primitives, transition components or AutoCAD objects.  While more detail may enhance the visual model, that visual detail may not improve the overall design.

Î Exercise 1: Model the vertical vessel as shown using an Equipment Primitive and several Associative Primitives.

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Primitives > Cylinders > Vertical. 2. When the Create New Equipment Tag dialog opens, enter the nozzle tag CH‐101 and click OK.

3. In the Vertical Cylinder dialog, enter the following information: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

CH‐101

CH‐101

CH‐101

A

17’

8100

8100

B

8’

2400

2400

4. Click OK. Note:

Jan‐08

If the Location Point dialog displays, click Esc to close it.


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

5. Place the cylinder with the following coordinates:

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Elevation

109’ 9”

32925

32925

North

991’ 1”

297450

297450

East

1040’

312000

312000

You will now add an elliptical head to the cylinder.

6. Select Associative Primitives > Heads > Elliptical. 7. Pick a point on the cylinder close to the top of the cylinder.    Note:

An axial component will be placed at the end that is closest to the point used to first select the component.

8. In the Associate Elliptical Vessel Head dialog, enter these values: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

VH‐101

VH‐101

VH‐101

A

8’

2400

2400

Link Diameter

ON

ON

ON

B

2’

600

600

C

0

0

0

D

0

0

0

9. Click OK to attach the head to the cylinder. You will now add a cone to the cylinder.

10. Select Associative Primitives > Cones > Axial. 11. Click a point on the cylinder CH‐101 near the bottom of the cylinder.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Custom Components

12. In the Associate Axial Cone dialog enter these values: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

BC‐101

BC‐101

BC‐101

A

6’ 6”

1950

1950

B

8’

2400

2400

Link Diameter

ON

ON

ON

C

4’

1200

1200

13. Click OK to attach the cone to the cylinder. 14. Select Vessels > Add Legs from the Equipment menu. 15. Pick cylinder CH‐101 (do not pick a point on the head or cone section.) 16. Define the leg parameters using these values: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

HL‐101

HL‐101

HL‐101

No. of Legs

4

4

4

A

45°

45°

45°

B

12’

3600

3600

C

2’ 3”

675

675

D

10”

250

250

17. Click Save.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

Creating a Component from Simple Primitives Some primitive types are available as both Equipment and Associative primitives.  The Triangular Solid is a good example.  In the next exercise you will create a horizontal vessel from simple primitives.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Custom Components

When used as an Equipment Primitive:

ƒ

Enter the values for height, width and thickness in the dialog

ƒ

To place the primitive, provide coordinates, direction angle and orientation angle.

When used as an Associative Primitive:

ƒ

Enter values for each physical attribute AND the location of the primitive with respect to the parent primitive.

ƒ

To place the Associative Primitive, provide distance and angle in all three planes

Î Exercise 1: Create a horizontal vessel with triangular legs as shown.

1. Select Equipment > Equipment Primitives > Cylinders > Horizontal. 2. In the Create New Equipment Tag dialog, enter CYL‐1. 3. Click OK. 4. In the Horizontal Cylinder dialog enter the following parameters: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

CYL‐1

CYL‐1

CYL‐1

A

12’

3600

3600

B

5’

1500

1500

5. Click OK.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

6. Place the cylinder using these coordinates:

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Elevation

105’

31500

31500

North

970’

291000

291000

East

1030’

309000

309000

Angle

0

0

0

7. Select Equipment > Equipment Primitives > Triangular Solid. 8. In the Create New Equipment Tag dialog, enter LEG‐1.   9. Click OK. 10. In the Equipment Triangular Solid dialog enter these coordinates: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Tag

LEG‐1

LEG‐1

LEG‐1

A

7’

2100

2100

B

5’

1500

1500

C

11”

275

275

11. Click OK.   12. Place the solid at these coordinates:

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Elevation

100’

30000

30000

North

1032’

291000

291000

East

970

309475

309475

Direction

0

0

0

Orientation

0

0

0

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Custom Components

13. Copy LEG‐1 and place the copy 7’ 11” (2375 mm) east of the original. 14. Use the Equipment > Equipment Tools > Edit Component to rename the new leg LEG‐2. Click Save.

Creating  Defined Equipment The  Defined Equipment command allows you to combine AutoPLANT primitives with native AutoCAD elements to create a unique component including dimensions and location attributes. Follow these basic steps for creating the component.

1. Select Equipment >  Defined. Provide a name for the component.

2. The  Defined Equipment dialog appears. The only functions available are Select Entities or Cancel out of the command.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

3. Select the entities to include in your component. Click Enter.   Note:

Once selected, you cannot add or remove components.

4. The  Defined Equipment dialog re‐opens allowing you to enter the values for the component.

Identification   The Tag you defined previously displays in the Tag field. The Group ID is a read‐only field.  This value was automatically generated when you selected the primitives to be combined for your component. The Description field allows you to enter additional information about the component.

Overall Dimensions AutoPLANT works with  defined equipment as if it were a horizontal cylinder.  The Length and Radius values give the cylinder dimension.  These attributes can be entered manually, or picked from the AutoCAD screen by clicking on the <

Note:

While you can change the values, there will be no visual changes to the graphical representation.

USC For your equipment to exist in space, you need to define the local coordinate system including Location Point, Direction Point and Orientation Point. The X‐axis is used as the centerline axis, defined as the vector from the Location Point to the Direction Point.    The Y‐axis is defined as the vector from the Direction Point to the Orientation Point.    To define X and Y, you can enter the values manually or pick from the AutoCAD screen by clicking on the <

Dec‐08

Custom Components

Create a Custom Vessel Î Exercise 1:  Create a  defined equipment component from the horizontal vessel you generated in the previous exercise.

1. Select Equipment >  Defined. 2. Enter HV‐1000 as the tag in the Create new Equipment tag dialog. 3. Click Select Entities in the  Defined Equipment dialog. 4. Select the CYL‐1, LEG‐1, and LEG‐2 components in your model. Click Enter.   5. Define the UCS coordinates as listed below: Imperial UCS Coordinates Point

X‐Coord

Y‐Coord

Z‐Coord

Location

1030’

970’

105’

Direction

1032’6”

970’

105’

Orientation

1032’6”

982’

105’

Metric UCS Coordinates Point

X‐Coord

Y‐Coord

Z‐Coord

Location

309000

291000

31500

Direction

312600

291000

31500

Orientation

312600

291750

31500

Mixed Metric UCS Coordinates Point

X‐Coord

Y‐Coord

Z‐Coord

Location

309000

291000

31500

Direction

312600

291000

31500

Orientation

312600

291750

31500

6. Click OK.

Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Custom Components

7. Use the Edit command, rename the vessel and enter the dimensions as shown.   Attributes

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Length

12’

3600

3600

Radius

5’

1500

1500

8. Save your model. Once created, you can move, rotate, rename, add nozzles and copy the component like any other piece of equipment. This exercise completes the module.

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed the first module, let’s review what you have learned.


1. Assoc type components must be attached to an existing component to form an association.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Components in a model are easily deleted using AutoCAD delete. ƒ ƒ

True False

3. When placing an axial nozzle on a vessel, it is important to pick a point closest to the end of the vessel where you want the nozzle to attach.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Each time you route a pipe, it is important to make sure to specify the correct line number.

ƒ ƒ

True False

5. As you place a pump, the system will automatically increment the numeric code value in the tag.

ƒ ƒ

True False



Jan‐08


Equipment Modeling

Summary

Answers   1. True: All Assoc Type components including nozzles, structures and associative primitives must be attached to another component.

2. False: Although AutoCAD Delete will erase the component graphics from your model, the database link will only be removed when you use the Equipment Tools > Edit Component command.

3. True: Axial nozzles extend in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the cylindrical structure. During placement, the function places the component at the end closest to where you select.

4. True: For project consistency, line numbers are generally defined prior to the start of the project. Line numbers are changed easily by browsing within the Change LineNumber dialog.

5. True: Each time a nozzle is placed on a piece of equipment, the numeric value automatically increments to the next available number. The new value is easily modified by the Equipment Tools > Edit Component command.


ƒ

Model a pump with suction and discharge nozzles

ƒ

Model a horizontal vessel with radial and axial nozzles

ƒ

Model and edit a vertical vessel

ƒ

Model a heat exchanger with inlet and outlet nozzles

ƒ

Use the copy command to create spare components

ƒ

Create custom components

Equipment Modeling


Dec‐08

Database Management

Overview In this module you will learn how to edit database records while maintaining the accuracy of the database. You will learn how to repair a lost or corrupted database from component information saved in the drawing file.

Prerequisites ƒ

Basic understanding of how component data is created while building a model

Objectives   ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

Manage and edit database records Clean and repair a corrupted database Create an Equipment List report Create a Nozzle Schedule report Check drawing accuracy against component reports


Database Management


Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let’s define what you already know.

Questions   1. In Standalone Mode, all relationship data is written to an individual drawing database. ƒ ƒ

True False

2. The AutoCAD Delete command will completely erase components from your drawing. ƒ ƒ

True False

3. Creating a Nozzle report is a good method of checking the accuracy of your drawing.   ƒ ƒ

True False

Answers   1. True: In Mode, relationship data is written to the individual drawing database. The manner the data is stored is dependent on the project mode selected – Standalone, Distributed and Central Mode.

2. False: AutoCAD Delete will only erase the component graphic from the drawing, leaving the component data in the database. It is best to use the AutoPLANT Delete Component command to delete the graphic and component data. You can also use the Equipment > Database Tools > Clean Database command to clean the database of unused component data.

3. True: A detailed Nozzle Schedule report includes component data including Tag No., size, and placement coordinates, enabling you to  the accuracy of your model.

Database Management


Dec‐09

Managing the Database

Managing the Database When a component is placed in a drawing, a record is written to an external database. The manner in which this data is stored is dependent upon the project mode selected – Projects or  Configurations.   Additional information can be found in ONLINE Help.   Nozzle or equipment component records are always written to the appropriate nozzle or equipment database table.

ƒ

Equipment placement commands write the equipment name, tag number and description to the Equipment Table.

ƒ

Nozzle placement commands write information including associated equipment tag, nozzle tag, nominal size, line number and other information from the chosen spec into the Nozzle Table.

Database Tools Menu The Database Tools menu includes functions for editing and managing component records stored in the project database.  Additional functions include tools for cleaning, repairing or restoring a corrupted database based on the type of component information stored in the drawing.

Dec‐09


Database Management

Editing Database Records

Editing Database Records Each component in a drawing has a unique record in the database.  s can easily view and amend the records from within the AutoPLANT application that accesses the project database. Editing records is typically the ’s responsibility.   Below are examples of the equipment record for the bottom head on T‐136. This dialog was obtained by Equipment > Database Tools > Edit Equipment and selecting a component in the model.

   You can also edit a database entry with the Set Field Value menu command.  From the Edit Equipment Database Field dialog you can select the attribute you want to change and provide the new value.



Database Management


Dec‐09

Cleaning the Database

Cleaning the Database The drawing database can occasionally become “out of sync” with the drawing.  The database tools clean the database of unnecessary component data and allow you to edit individual component records. The Clean Database command removes records from the database that no longer have a link to a component graphic in the model.  This can happen if you use the AutoCAD Delete command instead of the AutoPLANT Delete Component command.

Note:

Cleaning the database will erase your AutoCAD undo/redo buffer.

To clean the database, select Equipment > Database Tools > Clean Database and then answer Yes to the confirmation prompt.

Active Connections Whenever you open an AutoPLANT model, the appropriate AutoPLANT database is copied to a local temporary directory.  This greatly improves performance as you do not have to continually access a network for database information. The Equipment > Database Tools > Active Connections opens the Current Database Connections dialog and lists all of the temporary databases you are currently connected to.   You should only be connected to one database. You can disconnect from all other databases from this dialog.

Dec‐09


Database Management

Repairing / Rebuilding the Database

Repairing / Rebuilding the Database If your external database has been corrupted or lost, you can repair it or completely replace it with the data being stored in the model.  An indicator that your database has been damaged is an empty component dialog. The Equipment Tools > Repair Database command examines every component in the drawing and fills in missing physical component data with the values from the drawing.   Database records will be replaced with the default values established by your Project .

Note:

If you run a Repair or Rebuild after the exercises in this chapter, you will lose the changes you have made, since the values will revert back to those values established in the project dataset.

The Rebuild Database will delete the current drawing database and build a new one based on the drawing. This method is intended for severe circumstances. Repair Database and Rebuild Database make changes to your local database first, and then writes the changes to the project database when you save the drawing.

Database Management


Dec‐09


Editing a Database Record Î Exercise 1:  Edit the Long Description for vessel T‐136. 1. Open your equipment drawing.   2. Select Equipment > Database Tools > Edit Database from the Equipment menu.    3. Select vessel T‐136 to open the Equipment Database Record dialog.   4. Modify the Long Desc field to Vertical Vessel T‐136. 5. Click OK.    6. Update the long descriptions for each tag using the new values. Imperial Descriptions Item

Tag

New Long Description

Horizontal Vessel

VH‐45

16‐8 x 6‐8 Horizontal Vessel VH‐45

Boot on Horizontal Vessel

VB‐45

Vertical Boot on VH‐45

Horizontal Pump Main

P‐104

Main Horizontal Pump P‐104

Horizontal Pump Spare

P‐124

Spare Horizontal Pump P‐124

Bottom Head on Vert. Vessel

EH‐136

Bottom Head on T‐136

Vessel Legs

TL‐136

4 Legs on T‐136

Ladder

SU‐329

13‐6 Ladder on T‐136

Circular Platform

SU‐346

135‐degree Circular Platform on T‐136

Horizontal Exchanger

E‐106

Feed Effluent Exchanger E‐106


E‐107


Metric Descriptions

Dec‐09

Item

Tag


Horizontal Vessel

VH‐45

5000 x 2000 Horizontal Vessel VH‐45


Database Management



VB‐45



P‐104



P‐124



EH‐136


Vessel Legs

TL‐136

4 Legs on T‐136

Ladder

SU‐329

Ladder on T‐136

Circular Platform

SU‐346



E‐106



E‐107


Mixed Metric Descriptions

Item

Tag


Horizontal Vessel

VH‐45

5000 x 2000 Horizontal Vessel VH‐45


VB‐45



P‐104



P‐124



EH‐136


Vessel Legs

TL‐136

4 Legs on T‐136

Ladder

SU‐329

Ladder on T‐136

Circular Platform

SU‐346



E‐106



E‐107


7. Save the model.

Database Management


Dec‐09

Report Generator Utility

Report Generator Utility The AutoPLANT Report Generator utility is used by all AutoPLANT Plant Design applications to generate a report that can be output to a printer, file, or displayed in preview mode. Crystal Report (*.RPT) files formats are configured for your use with a specific report name and/or type.

Crystal Reports Engine The Report Generator functions use Seagate Software's® Crystal Reports™ run‐time engine to process the component data for the report.

Note:

You must first purchase the Crystal Reports software to generate new or modify existing report files.

When you request a report:

1. The Report Generator extracts the component drawing database records, as selected from the drawing database and saves to a temporary database.

2. The temporary database is cleaned to remove any records for components that no longer exist in the drawing.  In AutoPLANT Piping, the pipe cut lengths are recalculated.

3. The Report Writer (from Crystal Reports) extracts the data from the temporary database and processes it for the selected report file.

Report Types Reports are grouped by type. AutoPLANT Equipment includes two report types ‐ Equipment List and Nozzle Schedule.

Equipment List Type Two equipment list reports are provided:

1. Equipment List ‐ reports only the major pieces of equipment and omits associated components.

2. Detail Equipment List ‐ lists the primary equipment components and their associated components.

Nozzle Schedule Type Two reports are provided:

1. Brief Nozzle Takeoff – includes equipment and nozzle tags and nozzle size. 2. Full Nozzle Takeoff – includes projection, location and direction.

Dec‐09


Database Management

Generating Equipment and Nozzle Reports

Generating Equipment and Nozzle Reports The AutoPLANT Report Generator creates equipment, nozzle, and piping reports. The Equipment > Reports menu provides access to two pre‐defined reports: Equipment List and Nozzle Schedule.

Executing either of these options opens the AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog with the required function parameters for each report.

Database Management


Dec‐09


The Options section of the dialog has been disabled since they are piping related and therefore not required for the equipment reports. Report output Units can be changed to Imperial, Metric, and Mixed Metric. Output can be viewed on the screen, sent directly to a printer, or saved to an ASCII text file.

Equipment Report Î Exercise1:  Generate a detailed list of the equipment components in your model. 1. Select Equipment > Reports > Equipment List to open the AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog.

2. Check that the report settings are configured as shown below.

Dec‐09

Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Report Type

EQUIPMENTLIST

EQUIPMENTLIST

EQUIPMENTLIST

Report Name

DETAIL EQUIPM,ENT LIST



Units

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Precision

0’ 0 1/16"

mm

mm

Bore Precision

0’ 0 1/8"

mm

mm

Output

Preview

Preview

Preview


Database Management


3. Click OK. When the AutoPLANT Selections dialog opens, click the Drawing tab.

4. Click All to select all equipment components in the drawing.   5. Click OK to generate your report. Compare your report output to the example to determine if you have placed all of the components and modified their respective project database records as instructed.

Database Management


Dec‐09


6. After viewing the report, close the preview window. 7. Click Cancel to close dialog.

Nozzle Schedule Report Note:

Before generating a Nozzle Schedule report, close out any previously generated Equipment List reports.

Î Exercise 1:  Generate a nozzle list for the components in your drawing.   1. Select Equipment > Reports > Nozzle Schedule. 2. The AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog displays enabling you to configure the report as follows: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Report Type

Nozzle Takeoff

Nozzle Takeoff

Nozzle Takeoff

Report Name

Full Nozzle Takeoff List



Units

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Precision

0’0 1/16"

mm

mm

Bore Precision

0’0 1/8"

mm

Mm

Output

Preview

Preview

Preview

3. The AutoPLANT Selections dialog displays. Click the Drawing tab and enable the All option.

4. Click OK.   5. Compare your report output to the examples to determine if you have placed all of the nozzles as instructed.

6. After viewing the reports, close the preview window.   7. Click Cancel to close the dialog.

Dec‐09


Database Management


Database Management


Dec‐09

Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed this module, let’s review what you have learned.   Answer these questions to be True or False. Detailed answers appear on the following page.

Questions 1. An empty component dialog means your database may be corrupted. ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Once you have placed a component in your drawing you can never change the component description.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. Reports are generated from the drawing using Crystal Reports. ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Creating a Nozzle report is a good method of checking the accuracy of your drawing.   ƒ ƒ

True False

Dec‐09


Database Management

Summary

Answers 1. True: An empty component dialog means no data is read from the database. To repair the database, use the Equipment Tools > Repair Database command.

2. False: Component descriptions are easily modified using the Equipment > Database Tools > Edit Database command.  Pick the component and make the necessary changes to the database record.

3. True: the Report Generator runs on Crystal Reports. Nine report formats are included in Equipment. Crystal Reports software is required to generate new or modify existing report formats.

4. True: A detailed Nozzle Schedule report includes component data including Tag No., size, and placement coordinates, enabling you to  the accuracy of your model.


ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Manage and edit database records Clean and repair a corrupted database Create an Equipment List report Create a Nozzle Schedule report Check drawing accuracy against component reports

Database Management


Dec‐09


Questions 1. Working within a project environment enables you to pre‐define settings for drawing units, custom borders and components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Briefcase mode enables you to save component data in the drawing file.   ƒ ƒ

True False

3. You can easily change the drawing units at any time during your modeling session. ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Document Manager enables you to easily manage all drawing files related to a project ƒ ƒ

True False

5. An example of a Project Object the Equipment application is Line Number.   ƒ ƒ

True False

6. Setting up a Work Area enables you to edit reference drawings from multiple disciplines. ƒ ƒ

True False

7. Location Points refers to the CAD coordinate system.   ƒ ƒ Dec‐09

True False 123 Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Course Summary

Review

8. Component Tag numbers cannot be duplicated.   ƒ ƒ

True False

9. Nozzles are considered associative components. ƒ ƒ

True False

10. Using the AutoCAD delete function, erases the component from your drawing.   ƒ ƒ

True False

11. If the external database is corrupted, you will need to start your modeling session from the beginning.

ƒ ƒ

True False

12. Creating a Nozzle Report gives you a good method of checking for missing components. ƒ ƒ

True False

Course Summary


Dec‐09

Review

Answers 1. True: Project mode enables you to define all drawing defaults and settings prior to starting the project.  All team  create models and deliverables to the same set of design rules.

2. True:  Briefcase mode is a associated with a  Configuration. It does not require a project, but stores all component data in the drawing.  Drawings in a Project can be saved in Briefcase mode and Briefcase drawings can be added to an existing Project.

3. False:  If you are working within a Project environment, drawing units and all other project settings are defined by a Project  before any team member begins the modeling process.

4. True: Document Manager is a utility application delivered with AutoPLANT. Using Document Manager to launch and manage drawing files guarantees that all related data is saved in the appropriate location with a project, ensuring access for all team .

5. True: The only Project Object used when placing equipment components is the LineNumber. Once the Project  creates the list of Line Numbers to be used in the project, all components placed on  a specific line number will form the correct relationship

6. False: A  can only place equipment components in a current drawing. Connections to the components in a reference drawing do not change the reference drawing in any way. No edits can be made to reference drawings.

7. False: Location Points are reference points created by the  to position equipment components. Dynamic relationships in a Location Point make it easier for the  to move equipment, without worrying about connected components.

8. False: All tag numbers within a drawing are unique. However, if you wish to use an existing tag number, a link to the original tag number is created upon placement.

9. True: When you place a nozzle, it must be attached to an existing component to form an association.

10. False:  When you use the standard AutoCAD delete function to erase components from your drawing, only the graphic is deleted.  Component data remains in the database. You can use the Clean Database function to remove the data.

11. False: A corrupted or lost database can be replaced from the data stored within the drawing. The Repair Database command will examine each component in the drawing and fills in the missing component values in the database.

12. True:   By creating both an equipment report and a nozzle report you can easily   your components have been placed accurately

Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review


Course Summary


Dec‐09

AutoPLANT Piping Fundamentals V8i Bentley Institute Course Guide

TRN010280‐1/0002





V8i


Dec-09

Table of Contents

Course Overview ________________________________________________________ 1 Course Description ___________________________________________________________ 1 Target Audience _____________________________________________________________ 1 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 1 Course Objectives ____________________________________________________________ 1 Modules Included ____________________________________________________________ 2 System Requirements ________________________________________________________ 3 AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products _______________________________________________ 3 ProjectWise ed Versions ______________________________________________________ 3 Databases ed _______________________________________________________________ 3 Installing the Training Project __________________________________________________ 4 Introductory Knowledge ______________________________________________________ 6 Questions ________________________________________________________________________ 6 Answers _________________________________________________________________________ 7

Application Startup _____________________________________________________ 9 Overview ___________________________________________________________________ 9 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 9 Objectives __________________________________________________________________ 9 AutoPLANT Application Startup _______________________________________________ 10 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Start Menu __________________________________ 10 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Desktop Icon ________________________________ 11 Launching AutoPLANT Applications from Document Manager ______________________________ 12

Piping Model Setup ____________________________________________________ 15 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 15 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 15 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 15 Creating a New Piping Model _________________________________________________ 16 Deleting Documents _______________________________________________________________ 21 Save Command ___________________________________________________________________ 21 Save As Command ________________________________________________________________ 21 Reopening Your Model from Document Manager _______________________________________ 22 Dec‐09


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Touring the Interface ________________________________________________________ 22 Piping Menu _____________________________________________________________________ 23 Toolbars and Tooltips ______________________________________________________________ 23 Drawing Preferences ________________________________________________________ 25 Drawing Settings __________________________________________________________________ 25 Drawing Mode and Representation ___________________________________________________ 25 Component Settings _______________________________________________________________ 25 Other Settings ____________________________________________________________________ 25 Component Preferences______________________________________________________ 27 Component Preferences Control _______________________________________________ 28 Relationships ____________________________________________________________________ 28 Project Preferences _______________________________________________________________ 28 Filtering Preferences _______________________________________________________________ 29 Work Areas ________________________________________________________________ 30 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 33 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 33 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 34 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 34

Component Placement __________________________________________________ 35 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 35 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 35 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 35 Component Placement Methods _______________________________________________ 36 Placement Points – Ports ___________________________________________________________ 38 Placement Toolbars _______________________________________________________________ 38 Pipeline L1008 ______________________________________________________________ 39 Valve Placement __________________________________________________________________ 39 Placing  PSV Valves ________________________________________________________________ 40 Add a Slip‐on Flange _______________________________________________________________ 41 Adding an Elbow __________________________________________________________________ 42 Default Specifications ______________________________________________________________ 42 Adding Pipe Segments to Placed Components __________________________________________ 43 Pipeline L1004 ______________________________________________________________ 45 Tee Components Placement Methods _________________________________________________ 46 Reducers and Swages ______________________________________________________________ 49 Vessel VH‐45 _____________________________________________________________________ 50 Pump P‐104 _____________________________________________________________________ 52 Default Specification _______________________________________________________________ 54 Pipeline L1001 ______________________________________________________________ 56 Routing Pipe from Exchanger E‐106 ___________________________________________________ 57 Using Auto Flange _________________________________________________________________ 59 Aligning to Reference Drawings ______________________________________________________ 62 AutoPipe Router ____________________________________________________________ 64 Table of Contents


Dec‐09

Table of Contents

Using AutoPipe to Place Connecting Pipe ______________________________________________ 65

Using Point Filters ___________________________________________________________ 66 Method 1:  Point Filter Only _________________________________________________________ 66 Method 2:  Point Filter and OSNAP ___________________________________________________ 66 Flange Placement Methods ___________________________________________________ 67 Method 1:  Placed in space _________________________________________________________ 67 Method 2: Fitting‐to‐fitting placement ________________________________________________ 68 Method 3: Relative placement _______________________________________________________ 69 Inserting Components in Existing Lines __________________________________________ 70 Pipeline L1002 ______________________________________________________________ 72 Component Selection ________________________________________________________ 81 AutoPLANT Selections Dialog ________________________________________________________ 81 Build a Query to Automate Pipe Routing _______________________________________________ 84 Clipping Planes _____________________________________________________________ 85 Loading AutoPLANT vclip Utility ______________________________________________________ 85 Pipeline L1007 ______________________________________________________________ 87 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 95 Questions: _______________________________________________________________________ 95 Answers: ________________________________________________________________________ 96 Summary: _________________________________________________________________ 97

Additional Components _________________________________________________ 99 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 99 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 99 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 99 Branch Connections ________________________________________________________ 100 Tap Ports _______________________________________________________________________ 100 Placing an Independent Tap Port ____________________________________________________ 101 Placing Olets ____________________________________________________________________ 101 Placing Elbolets __________________________________________________________________ 102 Placing Latrolets _________________________________________________________________ 103 Placing Stub‐Ins__________________________________________________________________ 107 Valve Topworks ___________________________________________________________ 111 Placing Simple Topworks __________________________________________________________ 112 Placing Lever Topworks ___________________________________________________________ 112 Editing Topworks ________________________________________________________________ 113 s _________________________________________________________________ 116 Placing s _________________________________________________________________ 116 Editing s _________________________________________________________________ 118 Component Modules _______________________________________________________ 119 Loading Component Modules ______________________________________________________ 120 Challenge Exercise _______________________________________________________________ 121

Dec‐09


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Module Review ____________________________________________________________ 122 Questions: ______________________________________________________________________ 122 Answers: _______________________________________________________________________ 123 Summary: ________________________________________________________________ 124

Routing Options ______________________________________________________ 125 Overview _________________________________________________________________ 125 Prerequisites ______________________________________________________________ 125 Objectives ________________________________________________________________ 125 Auto Router Mode _________________________________________________________ 126 Centerline Routers _________________________________________________________ 127 From Dialog _____________________________________________________________________ 128 From Polyline ___________________________________________________________________ 133 Connectivity Checking ______________________________________________________ 135 Connectivity Checker Commands ____________________________________________________ 135 Check Run ______________________________________________________________________ 136 Components ________________________________________________________________ 137 Module Review ____________________________________________________________ 139 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 139 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 140 Summary _________________________________________________________________ 140

Reporting Tools ______________________________________________________ 141 Overview _________________________________________________________________ 141 Prerequisites ______________________________________________________________ 141 Objectives ________________________________________________________________ 141 Piping Tools Menu _________________________________________________________ 142 Graphic Preferences ________________________________________________________ 143 Representations ___________________________________________________________ 144 Component Manipulation Tools ______________________________________________ 145 Components ________________________________________________________________ 145 Move Components _______________________________________________________________ 146 Align Components _______________________________________________________________ 146 Insert Components _______________________________________________________________ 146 Rotate Components ______________________________________________________________ 146 Delete Components ______________________________________________________________ 146 Mend Components _______________________________________________________________ 146 Delete and Mend Components _____________________________________________________ 146 AutoCAD Copy Command ___________________________________________________ 147 Control C and Control V ___________________________________________________________ 149 Change Size/Change Spec Utility ______________________________________________ 150 Dismantled Components Field ______________________________________________________ 150 Table of Contents


Dec‐09

Table of Contents

Rebuilt Components Field _________________________________________________________ 151 Attachments and s _________________________________________________________ 151

Database Tools ____________________________________________________________ 152 Edit Component _________________________________________________________________ 153 Update Components _____________________________________________________________ 155 Spec Browser ___________________________________________________________________ 158 Update From Spec _______________________________________________________________ 160 Clean Database __________________________________________________________________ 160 View Database __________________________________________________________________ 161 Database Information _____________________________________________________________ 162 Active Connections _______________________________________________________________ 162 Report Generation _______________________________________________________________ 163 Bill of Materials __________________________________________________________________ 164 Generating a Bill of Materials Reports ________________________________________________ 165 Module Review ____________________________________________________________ 171 Questions: ______________________________________________________________________ 171 Answers: _______________________________________________________________________ 172 Summary: ________________________________________________________________ 172


Dec‐09

v Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

vi Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Dec‐09

Course Overview Course Description This course is designed for the Piping Designer or drafter. Students learn time‐saving methods for routing pipe between equipment components.  By selecting pre‐defined properties including spec, line type and insulation, the student assures consistency within the shared project environment. Branching connections, including tees and olets, valve topworks and s complete the complex piping model.  Significant importance of connectivity between all components becomes apparent when viewing database records and generating reports.

Target Audience ƒ

Designed for the new  with little or no exposure to a piping modeling application.

Prerequisites ƒ ƒ

The student must have a basic understanding of AutoCAD 2D and 3D functionality. The AutoPLANT Equipment Fundamentals course is a recommended course prior to creating a piping model.

Course Objectives   ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

Create a complex three‐dimensional piping model.   Learn how to increase productivity using additional pipe routing methods. Learn how to view and edit component data. Learn how to create Bill of Materials for drawings and reports.


Course Overview

Modules Included

Modules Included ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Piping Model Setup Component Placement Additional Components   Routing Options Reporting Tools

Course Overview


Dec‐09

System Requirements

System Requirements   The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in the AutoPLANT Plant Design V8i (Version 08.11.05).   Processor:


Operating System:




Internet:


Memory:

2GB or greater

Hard Disk:


Input Device:


Output Device:





2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009


2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008


2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Building Systems:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

AutoCAD Mechanical:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Note:




Databases ed

Microsoft Access 2000, 2002, 2003, 2007   SQLServer 2000, 2003, 2005 and MSDE and SQL Server Express   Oracle 9i Release 2, Oracle 10g Release 2, Oracle 11g Release 1d Dec‐09


Course Overview



ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ



Î Exercise 1: Install the Training Project dataset and add the project as a root directory. 1. Make sure all AutoPLANT applications are closed.   2. the dataset file AP_FV8i_PIP.exe.   3. Save the file to your desktop.   4. Double click the file AP_FV8i_PIP.exe.   5. Click Unzip to begin the extraction to the root directory of the C drive (C:\). 6. Click Close.   7. From your Windows Start menu, click Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project .

8. From the File menu click Add Root to display the Browse for Folder dialog. Note:



Course Overview


Dec‐09


12. Close the Project .   You are now ready to begin your modeling session.

Note:

Dec‐09



Course Overview


Introductory Knowledge Before you begin let’s define what you may already know.

Questions   1. Document Manager is a utility application used for managing the relationships between drawings belonging to a specific project.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. A Port on a component indicates the location where another component may be connected.

ƒ ƒ

True   False

3. AutoPLANT uses the simple AutoCAD copy command to duplicate components in a drawing.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Topworks on valves always move with the valve. ƒ ƒ

True False

5. Auto Router mode enables you to connect components quickly.   ƒ ƒ

True False

6. Connectivity between components in your model assures you that the database is accurate. True False

7. Flat 3D drawings can be created in AutoCAD. True False

8. Components placed during a modeling session can be edited directly from the database. True False Course Overview


Dec‐09


Answers 1. True: Document Manager is delivered free with AutoPLANT applications. This utility provides an easy method of managing drawing files within a project environment. Files are stored to the correct location without additional input from the s.

2. True: A Port is the end of a component that can be connected to another component. AutoPLANT has many methods for easy connection of components.

3. True: AutoCAD copy provides a fast method for creating duplicate components. However you will be asked to rename all tag numbers associated with the copied component to guarantee the integrity of the database.

4. False: Although Topworks are attached to a valve, all topworks can be move and edited independently of each other.

5. True: Auto Router Mode is a Drawing Preference setting that allows you to quickly model consecutive components such as elbow, pipe segment, tee, pipe segment.

6. False:  One of the most important reasons for proper connectivity between components in your model is to ensure accurate dimensional annotations.

7. True: AutoPLANT Piping provides a method to create 2D and 3D representations of a model. These drawings are not intelligent drawings and therefore cannot be edited.

8. True: When a component is placed during a modeling session, the component data is added to the database. Database tools, such as Edit Component can be used to modify the component at the database level. These changes are automatically reflected in the model.

Dec‐09


Course Overview



Course Overview


Dec‐09

Application Startup Overview   This module discusses the methods for initiating the application startup. You will learn the best method for starting the application to ensure all related models and drawings that belong to a project are stored in the appropriate locations.

Prerequisites   ƒ

There are no prerequisites to the module

Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Learn methods for launching the AutoPLANT application

ƒ

Learn the benefits of launching the applications using Document Manager


Application Startup


AutoPLANT Application Startup There are multiple ways to launch the AutoPLANT applications.  When working within a project environment, you will find using Document Manager, ensures that all files related to a specific project are saved to the correct location.

Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Start Menu 1. Select All Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Plant Design for AutoCAD. This will start AutoCAD and load the AutoPLANT Plant Design environment.  The AutoPLANT 3D menu and toolbar have been added, providing access to an integrated set of AutoPLANT Plant Design applications and utilities.

2. This example shows how to start the Equipment application.  Click on the Equipment icon on the AutoPLANT toolbar or, click Equipment from the AutoPLANT 3D menu.

3. The Open Project dialog dislays, listing the default Project Root called Bentley Plant V8I Projects that contains the default sample projects installed with AutoPLANT.

4. Selecting a project will launch the application.   Note:

Application Startup

Sample projects are not recommended for production. New projects can easily be created from these sample projects.  The dataset installed for this course includes a Project that has been created specifically for this course.


Dec‐09


Note:

If you have previously selected a project, the system automatically opens to that project.

Launching AutoPLANT Applications from the Desktop Icon When AutoPLANT was installed on your workstation, the icon shown here was placed on your desktop.

1. Double click on the icon to open a Windows Explorer dialog showing the contents of the Programs\Bentley\Plant V8I folder in your  profile.

2. Double click on the Plant Design icon shown to the left (your AutoCAD version may be different). AutoCAD and the AutoPLANT design environment will load, displaying the AutoPLANT menu and toolbar.

3. To start an application, either click on the icon on the AutoPLANT toolbar or, select Equipment from the AutoPLANT 3D menu.

4. From the Open Project dialog, select a project to launch the application.

Note:

Dec‐09

You can place shortcuts to any AutoPLANT application on your desktop by selecting the icon with the right mouse button and dragging it to your desktop.  When you drop the icon, you then pick Create Shortcuts Here option in the pop up menu.


Application Startup


Launching AutoPLANT Applications from Document Manager Launching the application from the powerful utility program called Document Manager provides the ability to manage the drawing files and data within the project without additional input from the .

ƒ ƒ ƒ

Files are stored in the correct folders within the project.   New folders are made automatically.    Upon startup, the application automatically opens to the last project accessed.

You will be using Document Manager throughout this course, to manage your drawing files.

1. Double click on the Bentley Plant V8I icon to show the contents of the folder.   2. Double click to open Document Manager.    3. This figure shows the directory structure for the SAMPLE_IMPERIAL project.

4. To load a custom project you would use the File > Open Project function.  More on that later.

Note:

Once you have loaded a project, Document Manager will default to that project.

You can launch AutoCAD and the AutoPLANT applications from within an existing project when you choose to create a new file or to edit an existing file.

Application Startup


Dec‐09


To create a new equipment model    1. Click the AutoPLANT Equipment directory as shown below. 2. Right click to display the context menu and click New.

3. Both AutoCAD and AutoPLANT will launch. 4. Once you have created a model, you can use the Edit function in the same way to launch the applications.

5. Once the application has loaded, select AutoPLANT Equipment from the pull down AutoPLANT 3D menu.

Note:

Dec‐09

Use this same method to launch any of the installed AutoPLANT applications.


Application Startup


To Open a Project 1. From Document Manager click File > Open Project.    The Open Project dialog will appear allowing you to browse for a specific project.

2. The figure below shows the Training project.   Notice there are two P&ID drawings already in this project. Clicking on the drawing will display the properties in the right field.

3. Refer to the ON LINE help for additional functionality of Document Manager. Note:

At some point, Document Manager may alert you that VoloView is not loaded.  VoloView is an AutoCAD add‐on that is used for the Document View tab of Document Manager.

Document Manager is used throughout this course, to manage drawing files.   You are now ready to begin this course.

Application Startup


Dec‐09

Piping Model Setup Overview AutoPLANT Piping enables the student to place intelligent components into a complex structure. Placement accuracy and connectivity to components in the model is ensured by placing components in reference to project models. Predefined properties for all components including spec, line type, and insulation are selected from a control list. Exercises in this module teach the student how to set up the modeling environment.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should be familiar with the AutoPLANT project directory structure created with the Project  utility delivered with the AutoPLANT product.

Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Launch the Piping application from Document Manager

ƒ

Create a new piping model

ƒ

Load and dock the toolbars required for component placement

ƒ

Set the options in the Project Preferences control

ƒ

Add the piping model to the Work Area


Piping Model Setup

Creating a New Piping Model

Creating a New Piping Model Document Manager will be used to manage your project files. Refer to the steps outlined above for using Document Manager.   The Piping model you create will be added to a pre‐defined project that has been installed with the dataset.

Î Exercise 1: Use Document Manager to launch the application. 1. Open Document Manager from the Bentley Plant V8i icon. Note:

If this is the first time Document Manager has been used on your workstation the Open Project dialog will list the default Project Root Bentley Plant V8I Projects containing the sample projects as shown. Once you begin working in a project, Document Manager will automatically open to your current project.

2. Select File > Open Project.


Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09



This project has been created using Imperial Units.

5. Click OK. Your Document Manager now opens to the Training Project.

6. Take a moment now to tour the Document Manager interface.   Note:

Since this project was created for both AutoPLANT 2D and 3D fundamental courses you will see P&ID drawings included.

7. Selecting one of the P&ID drawings, shows the properties in the right Window.    You can also see a preview of the document when you select the Document View tab.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup


Now let’s create the piping model.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09


Î Exercise 2: From Document Manager, create a new piping document.   1. From the document list, select AutoPLANT Piping. 2. From the Documents menu select New or use the right‐click pop up menu.

3. In the New Document dialog enter: File name: Piping Name: Piping Description: Training Piping Model

Note:

Note:   The path to the documents in the location field is managed by Document Manager.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup


The Create, Record Only, and Reserve buttons are disabled until you select the type of document you want to create.

4. Click AutoPLANT Piping.   5. Click Create to start AutoCAD and load the AutoPLANT menu and toolbar.   6. Select Piping from the AutoPLANT 3D menu or toolbar. The Model Setup dialog displays.

The Model Setup dialog indicates the project name and units you have selected and enables you to define the direction for North, the dimensions for the model and origin of the model. By default, North is set to 90° to match AutoCAD. The origin coordinates (x, y and z) indicate your plant model’s origin. When set to 0,0,0 it is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). When the coordinates move from the default location, it is referred to as the  Coordinate System (USC).

Note:



Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

North

90

90

90

World Length

100’

30000

30000

World Width

60’

18000

18000

Origin X, Y, Z

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Insert North Arrow

OFF

OFF

OFF

Draw Limits Box

OFF

OFF

OFF

8. Click Done.  The Piping menu is added to the AutoCAD menu bar. 9. Click File/Save. Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09


Note:

The  dialog will not appear if you have previously enabled the Save  option when logging into this project.

Deleting Documents Once you create a document within a project, a new entry is made to the registry. To delete document files from a project, you should use the functionality of Document Manager.   When you select a document and right click, a Context menu provides you with the option to delete the drawing from the , as shown below.


Save Command ƒ


ƒ


ƒ


Save As Command ƒ

Dec‐09



Piping Model Setup



1. Select Programs\Bentley\Plant V8I Select Bentley\Document Manager. 2. Select the Equipment drawing from the Document Window.   3. Select Edit from the Documents menu or the right mouse click pop up menu.  You will need to load the Equipment application after AutoCAD starts up and AutoPLANT is loaded.

Note:


Touring the Interface The easy to use interface provides both drop down menus and dockable toolbars for accessing Piping functions and placement options.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09


Piping Menu The Piping menu is a cascading style menu, containing commands and functions used in piping model design.    As the figure shows, the Piping menu gives the access to all Piping commands such as preferences, placement of components, and online Help. Most menu options have a corresponding toolbar that can be opened from the Toolbars cascade. Throughout this course, the menu command sequence required to execute a command is defined in the text. Once you become familiar with toolbars, you may find them more expedient.

Toolbars and Tooltips AutoPLANT toolbars provide you with another means for executing commands and functions.   Many toolbars contain multiple, related, toolbars as flyouts.    A flyout toolbar is indicated with a small triangle in the lower right corner of a toolbar button.  The last command executed from a flyout will become the default command on the primary toolbar.   To view the command that will be executed by a specific toolbar button, position the cursor over the button and pause. A tool tip description will appear.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup


Î Exercise1. : Load the following toolbars.   1. Piping > Toolbars > Piping Functions Main.

   Piping Functions include preference settings, routing options, and reporting.

2. Piping > Toolbars > Piping Components Main.

This toolbar connects you to all the piping components available in AutoPLANT.

3. Piping > Toolbars > Direction Aids.

This toolbar allows you to respond to orientation prompts in X, Y, and Z independently from your AutoCAD north setting.

4. Piping > Toolbars > Responses.

This toolbar allows you to click a button for many of the Piping placement prompts, such as Toggle, Relative, and Align.  From here you can also Change the Reference point for a relative placement and insert a component into an existing pipe segment.

Note:

Piping Model Setup

These toolbars and flyouts can all be used in this course.  There are also toolbars for every piping component and each of the tool groups.


Dec‐09

Drawing Preferences

Drawing Preferences   Drawing Preferences for a piping model are set prior to starting the modeling session.

Drawing Settings The default Specification, Nominal Size, Insulation Thickness, Insulation Spec and Paint Code correspond to your current Component Preferences settings.  To review settings of a component in your model, click From Component and select the component in the drawing.  The Component Preferences dialog will open – or take you to – the Component Preferences control.

Drawing Mode and Representation During this course, you will be working in 3D drawing mode with double line representation.

Component Settings Your component color in AutoCAD can be determined by Size, Layer, Spec, Line Number, Paint, or Service.  The layer is based on Spec, Line Number, or Service.  These options and AutoCAD settings are typically set by your Project .

Other Settings Your Data Mode setting determines if your current component spec, size, line number and insulation properties are from the Connecting Component, or from the settings in your Component Preferences control.   Several of these controls will be discussed throughout this course.

Note:

Debug Mode should always be turned off.

A complete description of the Piping Drawing Preferences can be found in the Online help.   Go to AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Setup Menu > Drawing Preferences > Drawing Preferences.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup

Drawing Preferences

Î Exercise 1: Set the Drawing Preferences for your Piping model and display the Project Preferences floating toolbar.

1. Select Piping > Setup > Drawing Preferences to open the Drawing Preferences dialog. 2. Set the preferences as shown below. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Specification

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

Nominal Size

6”

150mm

6”

Insulation Thickness

0”

0

0

Insulation Spec

AA

AA

AA

Paint Code

2

2

2

Drawing Mode Surface Resolution

3D 12

3D 12

3D 12

Representation

Double Line

Double Line

Double Line

Component Color

By Size

By Size

By Size

Component Layer

By Line Number

By Line Number

By Line Number

Data Mode

From Connecting Component



Auto Router Mode

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Show Insulation

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Sketch Mode

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Default Spec. Choice

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Weld gaps

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Auto Flange

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Advance Tap Port Method

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Tracing

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Use Symbols

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

Disable Tooltips

Check Off

Check Off

Check Off

AutoPLANT Selections

Check On

Check On

Check On

3. Click OK.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09


Component Preferences When a component is placed in a model, a relationship is formed between components existing in the same model or in other models included in the project. The AutoPLANT Equipment application manages these relationships by asg specific values to a Project Object. The only Project Object in AutoPLANT Equipment is the LineNumber.    Prior to creating a model, the Project  will create a list of LineNumbers. Each line number will be defined with unique values. All components that are placed using a specific LineNumber value will form a relationship.   Once the model is complete, these relationships are used for creating reports, Bills of Materials or for selecting groups of components for editing.   The image here shows relationships formed in the AutoPLANT P&ID drawings.  Run numbers refer to process lines in the P&ID. These same line numbers are used while placing equipment components and connecting pipe segments.     All Line Numbers listed in the Component Preferences control were created for the Training project installed at the beginning of this course.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup

Component Preferences Control

Component Preferences Control AutoPLANT components have identifying attributes.   Attribute settings can be changed from the Component Preferences control. To open the Component Preferences control select Piping > Setup > Component Preferences. If the Component Preferences control was docked for the Equipment modeling session, it will stay docked during the Piping session.

Relationships When docked to the side of your drawing screen, the Component Preferences control also shows the Relationship navigation tree. This control is covered in AutoPLANT istrative training courses.  By keeping the control in mini‐bar mode, the Relationship tree is closed and out of your way.

Project Preferences Project Preferences are attributes that have been defined by your Project   that apply to each component in your model.   A value for each attribute is required. In the Equipment application, LineNumber is the only Project Preference attribute defined. In the Piping application Project Preferences also include Area, Unit and Service.    Traditionally, these attributes represent plant geography, process, and fluid type.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09

Component Preferences Control

Filtering Preferences Since some preference settings, such as LineNumber, can have a long list of selections, you can filter the preference to show only a specified collection. If you double‐click in the Filter field for LineNumber and enter CW*, the selection list for LineNumber will only contain pipelines that start with CW, like the example shown. The Component Preferences control can be docked in mini‐bar mode, like the one shown.

Î Exercise 1: Dock the Component Preferences Control 1. Select Piping > Setup > Component Preferences to open the control.

Note:

A Project  typically defines the relationships for LineNumber, Area, Unit, Service, and Spool. Area, Unit and Service have not been defined in this project. This subject is covered in an advanced course.

2. When prompted, for Area, Unit and Service, enter 1 to define each of these relationships.

3. Dock the control at the left, top or bottom of the AutoCAD window. Docking at the left of the screen give you all functionality, all some s prefer the mini‐bar mode.

4. Now take a few moments to explore the features of the control.   5. Click File > Save. Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup

Work Areas

Work Areas During the equipment modeling course, a work area was defined that referenced drawings from other disciplines.  You will now add your piping model and additional piping data to the pre‐defined Work Area.

Î Exercise 1: Add the current piping.dwg and AT_PIPE1.dwg to the Work Area 1. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Setup.

2. From the Work Area Setup dialog click Open. 3. Navigate to the Bentley Training Project > Training directory.   4. Select the Area100.rwa file and click Open.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09

Work Areas

Note:

This Work Area was created during the Equipment Fundamentals exercises.

5. Click the Member option in the hip Status area to add your new piping drawing.

6. On the left of the Reference Drawings list, click Add. 7. Navigate to the project’s Supplemental directory. 8. Select the AT_PIPE1.dwg file and click Open. 9. Click Save.

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup

Work Areas

10. Click Done to close the dialog. 11. ZOOM Extents. Notice that all the drawings from the Work Area, including the equipment drawing are automatically referenced now to the current drawing.  This exercise completes the module.

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09

Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions 1. Using Document Manager is the easiest way to add a new drawing to a project.   ƒ ƒ

True False

2. The Project Preferences Control manages the relationships between drawing components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. Work Areas enable you to edit drawings from other disciplines. ƒ ƒ

True False

Dec‐09


Piping Model Setup

Summary

Answers 1. True: When you use the Document Manager interface to create or edit drawings, the new drawing is stored in the appropriate location. All project files are easily accessed by other  of the project team.

2. True: When components are placed on the drawing using the Project Preferences Control, these components form a relationship with other components in the same drawing or from other drawing in a project. Consistency is maintained across all drawings.

3. False: A Work Area is set up to allow you to connect piping components to intelligent components in a reference drawing. No change is made to the reference drawing.


ƒ

Launch the Piping application from Document Manager

ƒ

Create a new piping model

ƒ

Load and dock the toolbars required for component placement

ƒ

Set the options in the Project Preferences control

ƒ

Add the piping model to the Work Area

Piping Model Setup


Dec‐09

Component Placement Overview AutoPLANT includes various methods for placing piping components in a model to ensure connectivity to ading components. By placing connecting components first, the  can also take advantage of the automated pipe routing commands, connecting the pipe segments to the equipment components placed during the AutoPLANT Equipment Fundamentals course. The Equipment model becomes a reference file in the Work Area.

Prerequisites ƒ ƒ ƒ

Students should have a basic understanding of AutoCAD 3D   Students should have a working knowledge of component placement commands Students should be familiar with Work Areas

Objectives ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Place elbows, tees and flanges   Manually route pipe segments   Use the AutoPipe command to automate placement of connecting pipe segments Use the Clean Database command to maintain database integrity Copy and Rotate pipe segments and update properties Use the Auto Flange command to automate component placement Point Filters to position components Complete the piping model including all connecting components

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Component Placement Methods

Component Placement Methods The basic component placement procedure requires four steps. Specific options are provided at each stage, depending on the component type and how it is to be placed in the model.

1. Select the component: Components can be selected from a toolbar or the menu system.

2. Specify a reference and placement point: Components are usually placed with respect to a reference point. In most cases, the reference point and the placement point are the same since the default reference point is usually the end point of the component previously placed. You can attach a component directly to the reference point, place it a known distance from the point, or select one of the following options:

ƒ

In space: This component is not connected to another component, centerline, or piece of equipment. The  picks (or inputs) a new point in the model, which then becomes the reference point. You can also specify an elevation prior to picking the point.

ƒ

Inserted on an intelligent centerline: The component run direction and orientation will be extracted from the geometry of the centerline. The component picks up the size, spec and line number attributes from the line, if defined.

ƒ

Aligned with existing components: A component can be placed so that its centerline automatically aligns with the centerlines of two existing components (bend and branch components only).

Attached to previous Placed “in component space”

Inserted on a Centerline

Aligned to existing components

Component Placement


Dec‐09


3. Toggle insertion point: If you specify the reference point on an existing component, you can toggle to any of the new component's ports to specify the port that you want to connect to the existing component. For example, a tee may be inserted with respect to either of its main run end ports, its center point, or its branch end port as shown below. Some components, such as pipe, do not have a center point or a branch end and do not provide this prompt option.

Endpoint

Centerpoint

Branch

4. Orient the component: Many components have a branch/bend that must be oriented separately. For example, when placing an elbow, the downstream leg can be placed in the X, Y, or Z plane. This prompt will only appear for component placements that require it.

Examples of how a Tee may be oriented

Placement methods are explained throughout the exercises while you build your model. After a little practice, you be able to place components with ease and precision.

Dec‐09


Component Placement


Placement Points – Ports All PIPING components have associated ports. These ports are important connection reference points as insertion points for the component. The number of ports on a component depends on the component type and function.   For example, a tee has four ports:

ƒ ƒ ƒ

Two insertion/connection ports on the main ends of the component   One insertion/connection port on the branch end   One insertion port at the center

Endpoint Ports

Note:

Centerpoint Port

Branch Port

An inline component, such as straight piece of pipe may have only two ports to indicate the start and end points.

Placement Toolbars Toolbars are designed for fast component placement. Tools available on the Direction Aids toolbar use the traditional plane directions regardless of the AutoCAD setting for North.  In plan view, +X and –X represent right and left; +Y and –Y represent the top and bottom of the view; and, +Z and –Z represent Up and Down out of the view.

Response tools allow you to choose Toggle, Relative, Align, and Change Reference.  All of these tools are covered in this chapter.

As you build the piping model you will be learning a variety of placement routines. Theory for using each routine is described prior to it’s use during the exercises.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1008

Pipeline L1008   Piping components on line L1008 include a pressure safety valve, flange, elbow and two pipe segments.

Valve Placement Most valves are placed like other inline components with the option of selecting the topworks.  Cone Operators, Handwheels, and Gear Operators are selected from as list as shown.     The addition of topworks is covered in a future chapter of this training course.  Until then, valves will be placed without topworks. Click the Cancel button when this dialog appears.

Angle and Relief Valves The steps to place an angle or relief valve, require you to select a specification and provide additional information.     A sample of the Angle/Relief Valve dialog shows the type of information you can enter for the particular valve.    Control valve dialogs allow you to create a tag, change the Valve Length, add a Material Tag, and change the Long Description of the valve.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1008

Placing  PSV Valves   Î Exercise 1: Connect a PSV to nozzle N3 on vessel T‐136. In this exercise you will connect a relief valve to the 2” nozzle on top of vertical vessel T‐136 as shown on the preceding page.

Note:

You may find working in an isometric view helpful. The SW Isometric view, corresponds to the ISO1 viewport.

1. The Direction Aids toolbar will be used in this exercise.  Select Piping > Toolbars > Direction Aids.

2. If the Component Preference control is not currently open, select the Piping > Setup > Component Preferences and dock it in mini‐bar mode.

3. Set your Component Preferences to: Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

LineNumber

L1008

L1008

L1008

Spec

I_150LB

M_150LB

MM_150LB

4. Select Piping > Valves > Relief > Angle. Follow the prompts to place the valve using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.

5. Type Node and press Enter. 6. Pick nozzle N3 on T‐136. Press Enter. 7. You will be prompted with a Specification Selection dialog, select the 2x3 (50x80) valve.

8. Click OK for the default settings in the Angle/Relief Valve dialog. 9. Orient the valve in the +X or west direction by picking from the toolbar.      10. Cancel out of the AutoPLANT Selections topworks dialog.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1008

Note:

AutoPLANT Piping automatically retrieved the required MainSize from the nozzle because Data Mode in the Drawing Preference dialog is set to From Connecting Component.

Add a Slip‐on Flange   Î Exercise 2:  Connect a flange to the relief valve using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.   1. Select Piping > Flanges > Slip‐On . The default connection point is highlighted as the open end of the relief valve just placed.

2. Follow the prompts to connect the flange, using the fitting‐to‐fitting method, to the branch of the relief valve.   Press Enter to accept the insertion point.   The flange will be connected to the valve complete with bolts and gaskets as shown.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1008

Adding an Elbow   Î Exercise 3: Place a elbow a relative distance from the flange placed in Exercise 2.   1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   2. Respond to the prompts: Type R for relative and press Enter. Note:

Notice the rubber band line extends from the default flange port.

3. At the prompt, enter a distance of 12” (300mm) from the flange. 4. Press Enter to place the elbow. 5. Use the Direction Aid toolbar and select +Y to orient the outlet to the north. 6. Press Enter to accept the direction and end the command.   The elbow should resemble the figure below.

Default Specifications So far, you have been prompted with multiple Specification Selection dialogs.  If your project’s specifications have been properly set up by your Project , there will be a default choice defined for many components.  To reduce the number of interruptions to the modeling process, you can elect to have the defined default choices used automatically.

Î Exercise 4: Set the default specifications in Drawing Preferences 1. Select Piping > Setup > Drawing Preferences to open the Drawing Preferences dialog. 2. Check the Default Spec. Choice option. 3. Click OK. 4. Delete the elbow from the previous exercise. 5. Recreate the elbow from the previous exercise.  You should not be prompted for a specification selection.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1008

Adding Pipe Segments to Placed Components Î Exercise 5: Add a pipe segment to the elbow on line L1008 using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.

1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe. 2. Following the prompts: Type T and press Enter to toggle the insertion point to the end of the elbow running in the north direction. Press Enter again to accept the insertion point.

3. Type 4’ (1200mm) for the length of pipe to connect to port 2 of the elbow. 4. Press Enter to place the pipe.

Î Exercise 6: Connect the flange on the relief valve to the elbow.   1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe. 2. Pick the flange. Press Enter. 3. Refer to the command line:   Relative/Toggle/create taP/Elev/ : Connect to/<Enter Length>: Notice the “Connect to” option.

4. Type C to enable you to  the pipe to another component.    5. Pick the elbow.  Press Enter to place the pipe and end the command.   6. Save your model.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1008

Your finished L1008 should resemble the TOP view as shown.

Zoom in and  you have four welds as represented by the red dots:

ƒ ƒ ƒ

one connecting the first pipe segment to the elbow one connecting the second pipe segment to the elbow two connecting the second pipe segment to the flange

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

Pipeline L1004 Pipeline L1004 connects horizontal vessel VH‐45‐N2 to pump P‐104‐N1 using flanges, reducers and valves.   For an unobstructed view, you may want to change to the ISO2 view, which corresponds to a south‐east isometric view. DDLMODES is used to hide obstructing steel.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1004

Tee Components Placement Methods Let’s review the common placement methods using the Tee component for the example. Tees can be placed in space, by the fitting‐to‐fitting method or relative to another component as outlined below. You will gain experience using these methods during the exercises. These examples show the AutoCAD prompts you see on the screen. Throughout the exercises, the prompts are omitted, but the  input is included.

Placed in Space 1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Straight Tee. 2. Provide the location of insertion point. Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

If an elbow is the first component placed, you would change the current elevation and select the XY placement of the tee.

3. Select insertion point. Toggle insertion point/ :

There are three insertion points on an unconnected tee: centerpoint, endpoint and branch as shown below.

Centerpoint

Endpoint

Branch

Like an elbow, the insertion point of the tee is indicated by a yellow dot.  The Toggle command can be repeated as many times as desired. The insertion point is not accepted until you press Enter.

4. Select the direction of the tee – this is the run direction of the tee. Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/<Enter direction or press Return when done>:

Type the corresponding letter, or use one of the Direction Aids toolbar buttons to select the direction.

You can select directions (by letter or Direction Aid) until you are satisfied.   A value is not accepted until you press Enter.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

5. Select the orientation of the tee – this is the branch direction of the tee. Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter orientation or press Return when done>:

You can enter a direction, use the Direction Aids toolbar, or enter R and enter a rotation.  As with Direction, you can select multiple directions. A value is not accepted until you press Enter.

Fitting‐to‐fitting Placement 1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Straight Tee. 2. Provide the location of insertion point. Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

If the last component placed is not the component you want to connect to, you can pick any other placed component.  To do this, you may need to Toggle to the proper port on the other component. Press Enter to select default placement of fitting‐to‐fitting (fit‐fit).


Toggle to select either the end or branch.

4. Select the direction/orientation of the tee. If the branch was selected as the insertion point Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/<Enter direction or press Return when done>:

Or, if the end was selected as the insertion point Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter orientation or press Return when done>:

You can select directions (by letter or Direction Aid) until you are satisfied.   A value is not accepted until you press Enter.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1004

Relative Placement 1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Straight Tee. 2. Provide the location of insertion point. Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

If necessary, select the correct port of the correct component you are placing relative to. Enter R for relative placement. This will temporarily change your UCS so that the +X equals the orientation of the component being used as a reference point. Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

Enter the desired spacing between components, or pick or enter a point.  This will return your UCS to World Coordinates.


Press Enter.

4. Select alignment port. Toggle alignment port/ :

Here you can decide if the run or branch of the tee is pointed towards the component you are placing relative to. Or  If the branch is the alignment port: Select the direction of the tee. Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/<Enter direction or press Return when done>:

Or  If the endpoint is the alignment port: Select the orientation of the tee – this is the branch direction of the tee Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter orientation or press Return when done>:

Press Enter.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

Reducers and Swages Placing reducers and swages are typically inserted following these steps:

1. Define the location of the component. 2. You will be prompted for the specification of the reducer.    The Specification Selection dialog will filter the list of available reducers based on the component the reducer is being connected to.  If the reducer is not connected to another component, the settings in your Component Preferences control will be used to filter the specification list.

3. Select the specification.   4. Define the placement point. Pick either end or the center of the component. 5. If the reducer is being connected directly or relative to another component, you will be prompted with: Toggle alignment port/ :

For concentric reducers/swages, this determines the orientation of the component.  The port will not be accepted until you press Enter. or Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter orientation of flat side or press Return when done>:

For eccentric reducers/swages, this sets which direction the flat side of the component will face.  The orientation will not be accepted until you press Enter.

6. If the reducer is not being connected, or placed relative to another component, you will be prompted with: Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/<Enter reducing direction or press Return when done>:

This defines the direction of the smaller diameter end of the component.  The direction will not be accepted until you press Enter.

7. If you are placing an eccentric component, you will also be prompted for the orientation of the flat side.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1004

Vessel VH‐45 In the following exercises, you will be adding a component to the vertical vessel and a series of components to the pump as indicated by the numbers.    The first five components connected to the pump are placed using the Fitting‐to‐Fitting method. The last component is placed using the Relative Placement method.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

Î Exercise 1: Place a weldneck flange on nozzle VH‐45‐N2. Note:

To obtain an unobstructed view you may wish to change to the FRONT view using the Viewport utility that was previously set up. At the command line type APPLOAD and press Enter.   Then type FRONT.

1. Use Zoom Window to focus on horizontal vessel VH‐45. Note:

You can also freeze the layer of the xref STEEL drawing to get a better view.  At the command line, type DDLMODES and press Enter. Freeze AT_STEEL and press OK to close the dialog.

2. Set LineNumber to L1004 in the Project Preferences dialog. Use the fitting‐to‐fitting method to connect a weld neck flange to the 8”outlet nozzle on VH‐45‐N2.

3. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck. 4. Pick VH‐45‐N2. 5. Press Enter to place the flange.   6. Save the model.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1004

Pump P‐104 In this exercise you will add five components to pump P‐104 using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.

Î Exercises 1: Place the components on pump P‐104 using the fitting‐to‐fitting placement method.

Note:

Type ISO2 and press Enter to switch to a SE Isometric view, then ZOOM Window around pump P‐ 104 as shown below.

Point 1 Using the fitting‐to‐fitting method, attach a weld neck flange to the suction nozzle P‐104‐N1 on pump P‐104.

1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck. Pick the the 6" {150mm} suction nozzle coming out of the front of the pump.

2. Press Enter.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

Point 2 Place an 8" x 6" reducer {200mm x 150mm} against the welded port of the flange just placed. Orient the flat side Up. 1. Select Piping > Reducers and Swages > Eccentric Reducer 2. Pick the Weldneck Flange placed previously. 3. When asked for orientation of flat side, type U for up.

Point 3 Place a Weldneck flange against the reducer.   1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck 2. Pick the reducer. 3. From the Specification Selection dialog, select the 150 lb flange. Click OK.

4. Press Enter to place the flange and end the command.

Point 4 Place a Gate valve (without topworks) against the flange. 1. Select Piping > Valves > Gate > Gate.

3. Press Enter Note:

AutoPLANT automatically connects the component to the previously placed component.

4. When the Topworks dialog appears, click Cancel. 5. The valve without topworks is placed in the model.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1004

Point 5 Place a Weldneck flange against the valve. 1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck. 2. Press Enter to place the flange against the valve previously placed.

Note:

You did not get prompted to a pick a flange since the valve class has already been determined to be 150.

Default Specification So far, you have been prompted with a Specification Selection dialog for flanges.  If the project specifications have been defined by the Project , there will be a default choice defined for many components. To reduce interruptions during the modeling process, you can elect to have the defined choices used automatically.

Î Exercise 2: Set the default specifications in Drawing Preferences 1. Select Piping > Setup > Drawing Preferences.   2. Check the Default Spec. Choice option.   3. Click OK. 4. Delete the flanges and valve from the previous exercise.   5. Recreate the flanges and valve.You should not be prompted for a specification selection.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1004

Point 6 Î Exercise 3: Connect  the branch port of a Straight Tee a relative distance of 36” from the weldneck flange.

1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Straight Tee.   2. At the prompt, type R, press Enter to enable you to enter a relative distance. 3. Enter 36”. Press Enter to accept. 4. At the prompt, type T, Press Enter to use the Toggle Command to orient the branch port to face back toward the flange.

Note:

The Toggle command can be used as many times as desired. A value is not accepted until you press Enter.

5. Select the direction of the Tee using the direction aids. The branch port faces back towards the flange as shown in the figure.

6. Save your model. Your model should resemble the one shown.

The remaining pipe segments of L1004 will be routed later in the course using the Auto Router function.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1001

Pipeline L1001 In the following exercises, you will route a piping line from the shell inlet nozzle at the bottom of the lower exchanger E‐106.   The pipe bridges have been laid out so that East‐West pipe runs have a BOP elevation of 110' and 115', and North‐South pipe runs have a BOP elevation of 112'‐6".   You will learn how to place and orient elbows and tees relative to an existing fitting, or aligned with two existing fittings. All connecting piping will be placed using the Auto Router function.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1001

Routing Pipe from Exchanger E‐106 In the first exercise you will place flanges, elbows and valves as indicated by the numbers in the figure. You will be using both the fitting‐to‐fitting, and relative placement methods.

Note:

All connecting pipe sections will be added later, using the Auto Router function.

Î Exercise 1: Refer to the figure above to route the first five components from exchanger E‐106. Change the LineNumber in the Project Preferences control to L1001.

Note:

Type ISO2 and press Enter to move to the Front‐Right isometric view. PAN and ZOOM until the 8" {200mm} shell inlet nozzle on the bottom of E‐106 is visible.

Note:

You may also want to freeze the layer on which the steel was drawn to get a better view.  Type DDLMODES and press Enter, then freeze AT_STEEL. Click OK to close the dialog.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1001

Point 1 1. To place the first flange, select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   Respond to the prompts by picking inlet nozzle E106‐N4.   If the Selection Dialog appears, choose flange.

2. Press Enter to place the flange, gasket and bolts.

Point 2 1. To place the first elbow, select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   Respond to the prompts.

2. Press Enter to connect the elbow to the default open flange port. 3. For orientation, type S and press Enter to change the elbow branch orientation to the ‐Y direction.

4. Press Enter again to place the elbow.

Point 3 1. To place the second elbow, select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   Respond to the prompts:

2. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow a relative distance from the end of the previous elbow port.

3. Type 3'‐3" {975} and press Enter to specify the distance. 4. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 5. Type W and press Enter to change the elbow branch orientation to the ‐X direction. 6. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1001

Point 4 1. To connect a weldneck flange to the elbow, select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   Respond to the prompts.

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the flange insertion point to the other end of the elbow.

3. Select the appropriate flange from the Component Selection dialog.

4. Press Enter to accept the insertion point at the end of the elbow and place the flange.

Using Auto Flange If your project specifications include the proper settings and tables, AutoPLANT can automatically generate matching flanges. This functionality is known as Auto Flange.   To set the function:

1. Select Piping > Setup > Drawing Preferences. 2. Check Auto Flange. 3. Click OK.   In the next exercise this function will eliminate the need to manually add a matching flange after a valve.

Point 5 1. To connect a gasket and gate valve to the flange, select Piping > Valves > Gate > Gate.   2. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the flange face. Note:

The AutoPLANT Selections dialog displays to enable you to add topworks to the gate valve.

3. Click Cancel for no topworks.. The flange and gasket will automatically insert on the opposite end of the valve.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1001

Î Exercise 2: Place the remaining elbows as shown below.

Point 1 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90o LR Elbow.   Respond to the prompts:

2. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the open end of the flange. 3. Type U and press Enter to specify the orientation in the +Z direction. 4. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Point 2 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the last run command to place another elbow.   Respond to the prompts to place the elbow relative to the previous elbow at a specified bottom of pipe elevation.

2. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow at a relative distance from the elbow. 3. Type E and press Enter to display the Set Elevation dialog.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1001

4. Enable Bottom of Pipe.   5. Type 112'‐6" {33750} in the Elevation field and click OK.   This will move the elbow insertion point to the specified bottom of pipe elevation relative to the previous elbow's center port.

6. Press Enter to accept the default center of the elbow as the insertion point. 7. Type S and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Y direction and place the elbow. 8. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Point 3 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command.   Respond to the prompts:

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the insertion point to the horizontal end of the elbow. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow a relative distance from the elbow. 4. Type 8' {2400} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 6. Type U and press Enter to define the elbow orientation in the +Z direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1001

Point 4 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. Respond to the prompts as follows to place the elbow. Pick the port on the open end of the elbow moving in the +Z direction.

2. Type R and press Enter to place the new elbow a relative distance from the lower elbow.

3. Type 2'‐6" {750} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 4. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 5. Type E and press Enter to specify the orientation in the +X direction. 6. Press Enter to accept this orientation and place the last elbow.

Aligning to Reference Drawings In the next exercise you will place a flange using the relative placement method. This flange will align with the horizontal end of the last elbow placed (Point 1) and the flange on the pipe rack in a reference drawing (Point 2).

Note:

The Work Area setup includes AT_Pipe.dwg as a reference drawing.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1001

Î Exercise 3: Place a weldneck flange to align with the elbow and a flange on the pipe rack.

1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   The system assumes you are placing a flange on the elbow previously placed.   From the prompt the current elevation is shown as BOP 112'‐6"

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the insertion point to the horizontal elbow port. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the flange a relative distance from the elbow. 4. Type .X and press Enter to use XYZ filters to place the fitting. 5. Type CEN and press Enter.    6. Pick the end of one of the pipes on the reference drawing. of (need YZ):

7. Type @ and press Enter. 8. Press Enter to select the insertion point. 9. Type T and press Enter to toggle the alignment port to the face of the flange. 10. Press Enter to select alignment port. The flange will be drawn as illustrated in the figure.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

AutoPipe Router

AutoPipe Router   Once you have placed fittings in a model, an easy method for running connecting pipe is to use the AutoPipe Router. This command picks up the Main Size and LineNumber intelligence from the connecting component.    Changes are automatically made when reducers are encountered and if a change in LineNumber is detected, the router will not place pipe between the components.   The basic steps for using the AutoPipe Router include:

1. Select the router from Piping > Piping Components > AutoPipe. 2. Choose a selection mode from the dialog.

3. Click OK to start the router. A dialog reports each connection.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

AutoPipe Router

Using AutoPipe to Place Connecting Pipe In this exercise, you will use the AutoPipe routing function to place the connecting pipe between all components in lines L1001 and L1004.

Î Exercise 1: Place connecting pipe between all components. 1. Zoom Extents to view all of the piping components placed in the previous exercises. 2. Select Piping > Pipe Components > AutoPipe to display the AutoPLANT Selections dialog.

Note:

This dialog enables you to define a selection set of components in the current drawing. You will learn more about component selections in future exercises.

3. Click on the Drawing tab.   4. Enable the All radio button and click OK. AutoPipe automatically finds all aligned ports and places connecting pipe.   The images below show routed pipe for both L1001 and L1004.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Using Point Filters

Using Point Filters   The following section explains the method of using AutoCAD Point Filters which provide the ability to define offset distances by “ordinate” or “ordinate pair”.  In conjunction with the OSNAP functionality, Point Filters provide another way to locate components with respect to other drawn objects in your model.  This is useful if you do not know a relative distance, but you do have a component in your drawing that shares an ordinate, or two, with the desired location for the new component.

Method 1:  Point Filter Only 1. Select a component to be placed, such as an elbow or flange.   2. Set the port of the component being used as a reference. Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

Enter R Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

Activate point filter for single ordinate (X, Y, or Z): Select component with desired ordinate value of (need <>):

Now, AutoCAD needs to know what values to use for the other two ordinates.  Enter @ to indicate no change in those directions.

3. Complete the placement of the component. ƒ ƒ ƒ

Insertion point/Orientation for elbows Insertion Point/Direction for flanges Insertion Point/Alignment/Direction for tees

Method 2:  Point Filter and OSNAP 1. Select a component to be placed such as an elbow or flange. 2. Set the port of the component being used as a reference. 3. Select relative placement. Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

Enter R

4. Activate Point Filter Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

X, Y, or Z. Component Placement


Dec‐09

Flange Placement Methods

5. Activate OSNAP such as CEN or END. of

Select component with desired ordinate value. of (need <>):

At this point, AutoCAD needs to know what values to use for the other two ordinates.   Enter @ to indicate no change in those directions.

6. Complete the placement of the component. ƒ ƒ ƒ

Insertion Point/Orientation for elbows Insertion Point/Direction for flanges Insertion Point/Alignment/Direction for tees

Flange Placement Methods   The following section gives you a brief overview of additional component placement methods.

Method 1:  Placed in space Menu Selection:  Piping > Flanges > Weldneck

1. Provide the location of insertion point Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

If this is the first component placed, change the current elevation and select the XY placement of the flange.

2. Select insertion point Toggle insertion point/ :

There are three insertion points on an unconnected flange:  face, non‐flanged side and overall center of the flange as shown below.

Face

Non‐Flanged Side

Overall Center

The insertion point of the flange is represented by a yellow dot. The Toggle command can be repeated as many times as desired. The insertion point is not accepted until you press Enter. Regardless of how the flange is drawn, you are only selecting the insertion point.

Dec‐09


Component Placement


3. Select the direction of the flange Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/<Enter direction of Non-Flanged Side or press Return when done>:

Either key in the correct letter, or use one of the Direction Aids toolbar buttons to select the direction.

You can select directions (by letter or Direction Aid) until you are satisfied, a value is not accepted until you press Enter.

Method 2: Fitting‐to‐fitting placement Menu Selection:  Piping > Flanges > Weldneck

1. Provide the location of insertion point Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Insert/Elev/ :

If the last component placed is not the component you want to connect to, you can pick any other component.  Once picked, you may need to Toggle to the proper port of new component.

2. Enter to select default placement of fitting‐to‐fitting (fit‐fit). You may be prompted for the specification of the flange.

The flange will now place with necessary connecting bolts and gaskets.

Component Placement


Dec‐09


Method 3: Relative placement Menu Selection: Piping > Flanges > Weldneck

1. Provide the location of insertion point Current elevation Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

If necessary, select the correct port of the correct component you are placing relative to.  You may be prompted for the flange’s specification. Enter R for relative placement.  This will temporarily change your UCS so that the +X equals the orientation of the component being used as a reference point. Align/change Ref point/<Enter distance or Return for fit-fit>:

Enter the desired spacing between components or, pick or enter a point on the screen. The UCS will return to World Coordinates.

2. Select insertion point Toggle insertion point/ :

See instructions in Method 1.

3. Select direction of the flange Toggle alignment port/ :

See instructions in Method 1, for direction.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Inserting Components in Existing Lines

Inserting Components in Existing Lines At times, you may need to add a component to an existing line.   Follow this procedure:

1. Select a component to be inserted    Relative/Toggle/Insert/Elev/ :

2. Select the pipe segment the component is to be inserted into. Elevation/Insert/ :

Enter I to insert the new component.

3. Select the desired port of the pipe segment. Select reference port Toggle/<Enter to select currently highlighted port>:

Toggle to the end of the segment that will be the location for the new component. The port will not be accepted until you press Enter again.

4. Enter the offset from the selected port Align/change Ref point/Enter distance <0.0>:

You can: enter a distance, select the placement point, or Align to another component.   Changing the reference point will be covered later in this chapter.

5. Complete the placement of the component.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Inserting Components in Existing Lines

Î Exercise 1: Insert a set of break out flanges into L1001 as shown.

1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck. 2. Select the pipe segment. 3. Refer to the command line. Notice the “Insert” option.   Type I and press Enter.   The line type changes to dots and the port indicator becomes active.

4. Toggle to the northern port.   5. Press Enter to accept the port. Note:

A reference point will become active at the center point of the elbow. When using the Insert Command, the connecting fitting is the reference point, allowing center‐to‐center placement.

6. Press Enter to accept the fitting‐to‐fitting command.   Note:

Notice a yellow burst symbol at the end of the flange. This is a “Tentative t Marker”. This allows you to complete the insert command by adding a flanged object and automatically cut back the pipe. The cut back is complete on a mating object with the same size and end condition is placed.

7. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck to complete the insertion.   8. Save your model. Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1002

Pipeline L1002 In the next exercises you will be routing pipeline L1002 between the vertical vessel T‐135 and the horizontal exchanger T‐135.  In the previous exercises you learned to place connecting components and use the AutoPipe router to connect the pipe segments. During these exercises you will place both the pipe and connecting components.

There are many ways to complete this pipe run. You could start at the vertical vessel and work your way around to the exchanger. Or you could start from the exchanger and work in the opposite direction.   These exercises use a combination of methods giving you real world experience when aligning with fixed components.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1002

Î Exercise 1: Route a pipeline, including all fittings from the nozzle T‐136‐N1,   Refer to this figure as you route the line to ensure proper component placement.

Point 1 1. Type ISO1 and press Enter.  ZOOM Window around T‐135 and E‐107.   2. Select L1002 from the LineNumber field of the Project Preferences control. 3. To connect a flange to the T‐135 vessel's N1 shell inlet nozzle, select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   Respond to the prompts: Pick vertical vessel shell inlet nozzle T‐135‐N1.

Press Enter to accept the insertion point and connect the flange to the nozzle face.

4. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   Respond to the prompts to connect elbow to the flange using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.

Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the weld end of the flange.

Type D and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Z direction.

Press Enter again to accept this orientation and place the elbow.



Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1002

Point 2 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command.   Respond to the prompts to place elbow (2) relative to elbow (1) at a bottom‐of‐pipe elevation of 115' {14500mm}.

2. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow at a relative distance from the first elbow placed.

3. Type E and press Enter to display the Enter Elevation dialog as shown below. 4. Enable the Bottom of Pipe radio button and type 115' {34500} in the Elevation field,and then click OK.

5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow 6. Type W and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐X direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept this orientation and place the elbow.

Point 3 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (3) a relative distance from the horizontal end of elbow (2).

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the horizontal elbow port. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow at a relative distance from elbow (2). 4. Type 12'‐6" {3750} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 6. Type D and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Z direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1002

Point 4 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (4) a relative vertical distance from center of elbow (3).

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the vertical port of the elbow. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow at a relative distance from elbow (3). 4. Type 2'‐6" {750} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 6. Type S and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Y direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Point 5 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command.   Respond to the prompts to place elbow (5) relative to elbow (4) and aligned with one of the bottom elbows in line L1001 as shown below.

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the horizontal end of the elbow. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow relative to elbow (4). 4. Type A and press Enter to specify that you want to align this elbow with another component.

5. Pick the lower elbow on line L1001.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1002

6. Select port to align to: Press Enter to accept the highlighted elbow port.

7. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 8. Type D and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Z direction. 9. Press Enter to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Point 6 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (6) relative to elbow (5).

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the other end of elbow (5). 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow a relative distance. 4. Type 2'‐6" {750} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point in the center of the elbow. 6. Type E and press Enter to specify the orientation in the +X direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Point 7 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (7).

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the other end of the elbow. 3. Type R and press Enter to specify that you will place the elbow a relative distance. 4. Type 19' {5700} and press Enter to specify the relative distance. 5. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 6. Type D and press Enter to specify the orientation in the ‐Z direction. 7. Press Enter again to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1002

Point 8 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (8) a relative distance from elbow (7) and aligned with the lower elbow in line L1001.

2. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the end of the elbow. 3. Type R and press Enter to specify that the elbow will be placed relative to the selected port.

4. Type A and press Enter, to specify that you want to align this elbow to another component.

5. Pick component to align to: Pick the lower elbow in line L1001.

6. Select port to align to: Press Enter to accept the default port selected.

7. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 8. Type E and press Enter to specify the orientation in the +X direction. 9. Press Enter to accept the orientation and place the elbow. You will now connect a flange, gate valve, and a flange assembly to the horizontal port of elbow (8) just placed.

10. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   Respond to the prompts to place the flange.

11. Type T and press Enter to toggle the reference point to the other end of the elbow. 12. Press Enter to accept the insertion point at the horizontal port of the elbow and place the flange.

13. Select Piping > Valves > Gate > Gate and press Enter.   14. Click Cancel on the AutoPLANT Selection dialog, to connect the gate valve to the flange face without topworks.

Note:

If AutoFlange is selected in your Drawing Preferences dialog, there is no need to manually place the matching flange for the valve.

15. Save the model.   Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1002

Î Exercise 2: Complete L1002 by placing elbows at Point 9, 10 and 11.   Note:

Elbow at point 11 is aligned with elbows at Point 9 and 10.

Point 9 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   Respond to the prompts to connect the up‐turning elbow to the weld end of the flange.

2. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the weld end of the flange. 3. Type U and press Enter to specify the orientation of the elbow in the +Z direction. 4. Press Enter to accept the orientation and place the elbow.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1002

Point 10 You will now continue the line from the channel outlet nozzle N4 on the top of exchanger E‐ 107 shell by connecting a flange, then an elbow. This elbow will be used to align elbow (11) as shown above.

1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck.   Pick the shell outlet nozzle E‐107‐N4, then press Enter to connect the flange to the nozzle.

2. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow.   3. Press Enter to accept the insertion point at the weld end of the flange. 4. Turn Ortho OFF F8, then type CEN and press Enter.   5. Pick the open vertical port of elbow (9).   This causes the elbow to roll in the direction towards the up‐turning elbow.

6. Press Enter to accept this orientation and place the elbow.

Point 11 1. Press Enter to re‐execute the elbow placement command. Respond to the prompts as follows to place elbow (11) aligned with the elbow from the exchanger (10) and the up‐ turning elbow (9).

2. Pick the up‐turning end of the elbow (9) in line L1002.   You need to start the insertion from this elbow instead of the elbow near the exchanger to be able to align the branch end relative to that elbow.

3. Type R and press Enter to place this elbow relative to the selected elbow port. 4. Type A and press Enter to align this elbow to the exchanger elbow. 5. Type CEN and press Enter. Pick the open end of the elbow near the exchanger. 6. If necessary, type T and press Enter to toggle the selected reference alignment port to the end of the selected elbow. When selected, press Enter to accept the port.

7. Press Enter to accept the default insertion point at the center of the elbow. 8. Type A and press Enter to align the elbow branch to the exchanger elbow. 9. Type CEN and press Enter.   10. Pick the open end port of the elbow near the exchanger (10). 11. Press Enter to accept the open port on the end of the elbow.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1002

Press Enter to accept the selected port and place the elbow.

12. Save the model. Your model should resemble the figure.

You are now ready to place connecting pipe between the components using the Autopipe router.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Component Selection

Component Selection The AutoPLANT Equipment application uses the AutoPLANT Selections dialog to select model components for generating an Equipment List and the Nozzle Schedule reports. The dialog automatically appears for the  to select which components will appear in the reports.

AutoPLANT Piping displays the AutoPLANT Selection dialog whenever the AutoPipe router is used to automatically insert piping between connecting components.

AutoPLANT Selections Dialog The initiate the AutoPLANT Selection dialog, it must be turned on in Drawing Preferences. This applies to both AutoPLANT Equipment and AutoPLANT Piping.   The dialog is initiated in Piping when you use the AutoPipe router.   Select Piping > Pipe Components > AutoPipe. From this dialog, you can select components across all drawings in a project or from your current drawing.

Project Tab From the Project tab, you can select components across all drawing in a Project, regardless of which model you are currently working on.  When a Project Object, such as LineNumber is selected from the drop down list, all available Line Numbers in the project will be listed for your selection.   The Advance Mode allows you to build a query for more precise selection.

Note:

Dec‐09

Building selection queries across a project is usually performed by the Project . This course will focus on building queries for a current model.


Component Placement

Component Selection

Drawing Tab From the Drawing tab, only components in your current model can be selected.    There are three selection modes:

ƒ ƒ ƒ

All – selects every component in the model eligible for the process   Manual – will close the dialog. You can then select the components by picking from the model. Advanced – allows you to write a query based on model data, AutoCAD attribute, or project object.

Advanced Component Selection   The < > option allows you to define a query to select only components you want included for the AutoPipe run.

The right window lists the models in your project.  Any referenced drawings associated with the model are listed when you expand the document tree.  For projects with many drawings, you can apply a name filter to the list. When generating reports or isometric drawings, you can select multiple drawings for more inclusive output. For this course, you will only create queries for a one‐time use.  Therefore, you will not use the Query Selection section of the dialog.   Component Placement


Dec‐09

Component Selection

Query definitions require Data Type, Attribute, Constraint, and Attribute Values.  For more complex queries you can also apply the Or/And operators.

ƒ

Data Type:  Drawing Database information (3D Piping Data); AutoCAD attributes (Drawing); or Project Objects (Relationship).

ƒ

Attribute Field:  One of the attributes of the Data Type.  For example, LineNumber is an attribute of the Relationship data type; CUT_LENGTH of 3D Piping Data; and Color of Drawing.

ƒ ƒ

Constraint:  The relationship between the Attribute Field and the Attribute Value. Attribute Value:  The value of the Data Type attribute that you are interested in.

Note:

If you check the “Get attributes for selected docs only”, the selection list will be filtered to only the values of the Attribute Field that are contained within the documents you selected.

A more detailed description of this dialog is not needed for this course.    The AutoPLANT Selections dialog is fully documented in the Online help at  AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Database Tools Menu > AutoPLANT Database Tools > Other Functions > Component Copy Preferences > Drawing Selection > Drawing Selection.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Component Selection

Build a Query to Automate Pipe Routing   Î Exercise 3: Using the AutoPipe router, build an advanced query to route pipe between all components previously placed on L1002.

1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > AutoPipe.   The AutoPLANT Selections dialog displays.

2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. Enter the values for the following fields: Data Type:  Relationship Attribute Field:  LineNumber Constraint:  = Attibute Value: L1002

4. Click Add> to add the definition to the active query list.   5. Click OK.   AutoPipe will automatically find all the aligned ports in your model and place pipe between those ports.

6. Save the model. L1002 should resemble the figure.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Clipping Planes

Clipping Planes AutoCAD clipping planes remove portions of a viewport enabling you to focus on a specific region.  In AutoCAD, you can set the clipping planes from the buttons on the 3D Orbit toolbar. AutoPLANT provides a utility that allows you to set clipping planes without the additional Windows interface provided by AutoCAD.

Loading AutoPLANT vclip Utility 1. At the AutoCAD command line, type APPLOAD.   2. Locate vclip.lisp from …Bentley\PlantXM \Bonus directory 3. Click Load.   4. Click Close. Once the utility is loaded, typing vclip at the AutoCAD command line will start the utility.    For example: You want a front viewport to show a section you select from a top viewport. Both viewports are open and the top viewport is active. Command:

vclip

Pick Front point:

In the top viewport, click on a point that is located where you want the southern clipping plane located. Pick The Back point:

In the top viewport, click on a point that is located where you want the northern clipping plane located. Select a point in viewport to place the view:

Click into the front viewport to make it active and click in it again to activate the clipping planes.

Turning Off Clipping Planes AutoCAD clipping planes are not removed with a Zoom All or Zoom Extents.  To turn off clipping planes:

1. Activate the viewport where you want clipping planes turned off. 2. Enter PLAN in the AutoCAD command line. 3. Select a UCS to be applied to the clipped viewport.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Clipping Plane Notes ƒ

Clipping planes stay parallel and do not move with a viewport.  Therefore, if you clip and then rotate a view, you are likely to get unexpected results.

ƒ

If you apply clipping planes to the same viewport used to select the plane locations, the viewport should update to the new direction.  If not, you can use the AutoCAD View buttons to orient the viewport.

ƒ

The vector between your Front and Back points represent the line of sight in the clipped viewport.  For orthogonal clips, make sure the AutoCAD ORTHO is turned on.

ƒ ƒ

You can select front and back points with OSNAP. You can use clipping planes and the vclip command in Paper Space.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1007

Pipeline L1007 Pipeline L1007 connects from nozzle E‐107‐N1 and extends to the pipeway as shown below.



Î Exercise 1:  Place components on L1007 noted by points 1 – 4.   Point 1   1. Select Piping > Flanges  > Weldneck.   2. Respond to the prompts: Pick nozzle N‐106‐N1

4. Press Enter to select fit‐fit. Flange, gasket and bolts are placed.   Point 2 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. 2. Respond to the prompts: Press Enter to select fit‐fit to connect the elbow directly to the flange.

5. Enter orientation: Enter S for South.   6. Press Enter to place the elbow.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1007

Point 3 This elbow is aligned to the elbow on L1001.

1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. 2. Type R and press Enter to initiate the relative command. 3. Type A and press Enter to initiate the align command. 4. Select the elbow on line L1001. 5. Type T to toggle to the westward end (The end attached to the flange.) 6. Press Enter to accept.   7. Press Enter to accept the center insert point. 8. Orient the elbow to face up. Type U. 9. Press Enter to place the elbow.



Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1007

Point 4 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. 2. Follow the commands. Type T to toggle the insertion point to the opposite end. 3. Type R and press Enter to place the elbow a relative distance to another component. 4. Type E and press Enter to display the Set Elevation dialog.

5. Enable the Bottom of Pipe radio button. 6. Type elevation 112’6” {33750}. Click OK. 7. Press Enter to accept the default center of elbow insertion point.   8. Type S, press Enter to specify the orientation in ‐Y direction and place elbow.   9. Press Enter to accept orientation and place the elbow.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1007

Change Reference Point   When you define relative placement of one component to another, you create a line on which to place the new component. In this situation, you would only need to know the distance between the two components.    But what if you do not know the distance between the two components? Previous exercises used the Align placement and the AutoCAD Point Filter options to place a component relative to another without knowing the distance between the two components.    Another option is to change the reference point on the Placement Line to define a distance you do know.

In this figure, there is an elbow acting as the “relative to” component and a Placement Line extending in the direction of the selected port.  The placement point for the new component is shown as an asterisk at the bottom of the picture.  The distance from the elbow to the asterisk is unknown.    However, the pipe segment on the left has a centerline parallel to the placement for the new component. And the distance from Port 2 to the new component is known. The reference point, for the distance to the new component is the intersection of the placement Line and a perpendicular projection from either of the reference ports. If the new reference point has a centerline perpendicular to the Placement Line, such as the pipe segment shown at the bottom of the figure, the reference point is the intersection of the Placement Line and the centerline of the new reference component.  Because of this, the port of the new reference component is irrelevant.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1007

The prompt sequence for a change of reference point includes:

1. Once the port of the reference component is selected: Relative/Toggle/Elev/ :

Type R for relative placement Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

Type R to change the reference point Pick new reference point or reference component

2. Select new reference component Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

Toggle for correct port of new reference component Toggle/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance or Return for fit-fit>:

3. Provide distance from new reference point 4. Finish placement of the new component.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1007

Î Exercise 2: Continue L1007 by placing Elbow 5 relative to Elbow 4, a distance of 3’ 10” (910 mm) south of the centerline of pipeline PROD‐1020.

Note:

The above image is a SE view showing PROD 1020, and PROD 2020. Use DDLMODES to hide other layers.

Point 5 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. 2. Toggle to the appropriate port.   3. Type R and press Enter to initiate the relative command 4. Type R and press Enter to initiate the change Ref point command 5. Snap to end center of line PROD‐1020. 6. Press Enter to accept center insertion point

Note:

The new reference point will automatically orient itself inline with the elbow and the given reference point.

7. Enter a distance of 3’‐10” north of PROD 1020.   8. Enter D to orient elbow to face downward. 9. Save your model.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Pipeline L1007

Î Exercise 3: Complete L1007 by placing an elbow at point 6 and flange at point 7.    Point 6 1. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow. 2. Toggle to the appropriate port.   3. Type R and press Enter to initiate the relative command 4. Enter 2’6”, press Enter. 5. Press Enter to accept insertion point. 6. Enter orientation, type E for eastern direction. 7. Press Enter to accept placement. 8. Press Enter to accept center insertion point

Point 7 1. Select Piping > Flanges > Weldneck. 2. Pick elbow placed in Point 6. 3. Toggle the insertion point if necessary, to end of elbow. 4. Type R, press Enter to initiate Relative command. 5. Enter 6’4”, press Enter. 6. Select the flange from the Specification Selection dialog. Click OK. 7. Press Enter to accept placement.   8. Toggle the insertion point to face flange toward elbow. 9. Press Enter to accept insertion point and place component.   10. Save the model.

Dec‐09


Component Placement

Pipeline L1007

Î Exercise 4: Use the AutoPipe function to automate the placement of the pipe segments for L1007.

1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > AutoPipe.   2. When the AutoPLANT Selections dialog displays, select All. 3. Save your model.   This exercise completes L1007 and the Component Placement module.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed this model, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions: 1. Component placement methods are common for all elbows, tees and flanges. ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Piping segments must be ed to another pipe segment to be placed properly. ƒ ƒ

True False

3. The AutoPipe router command enables you to route pipe automatically between placed components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Copied components are automatically given a unique tag. ƒ ƒ

True False

5. Cleaning the database on a regular basis ensures that all graphics on your screen contains a one‐to‐one relationship with the database.

ƒ ƒ

True False

6. Default specifications speed the modeling process. ƒ ƒ

True False

7. Matching flanges for all elbows placed in the drawing are added automatically. ƒ ƒ

True False

8. Point Filters provide a method of defining offset distances from an existing reference component in a model.

ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

True False


Component Placement

Module Review

Answers: 1. True: The common methods used for placing elbows, tees and flanges include components placed in space, fitting to fitting and relative placement.

2. False: Pipe segments can be placed using the common placements methods for all piping components. You can also place a pipe component in space. Red dots at the connection points indicate a proper connection has been made.

3. True: Connecting pipe segments can be automatically routed using the AutoPipe command. This function enables you to place components throughout the model and when done, run connecting pipe between the components.

4. True: When you copy components using the AutoCAD copy command, the system automatically appends the tag number. You can also set the Component Copy Preferences to prompt you to enter a unique tag number. If a duplicate tag is entered, you must decide if this is a unique component or a link to an existing component.

5. True: Using the Clean Dabase command enables you to synchronize the components you see on the screen with the intelligent data stored in the project database. Graphics unintentionally created on the screen are removed. Status messages are displayed giving you all details.

6. True: If you set a default specification choice prior to your modeling session you will not be prompted to select a specification each time you place a component. This is good method to speed up the modeling process, but it is important the Project   has defined the defaults prior to beginning the modeling session.

7. False: If project specifications have been set up properly, the AutoFlange command can be used to automatically place matching flanges for your valves. The Auto Flange command must be set in the Drawing Preferences dialog prior to beginning the modeling session.

8. True: AutoCAD point filters provide a method of establishing a reference point for placing a new component. It is useful when you are missing critical information on where to place a component.

Component Placement


Dec‐09

Summary:

Summary: You are now able to:

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

Place elbows, tees and flanges   Manually route pipe segments   Use the AutoPipe command to automate placement of connecting pipe segments Use the Clean Database command to maintain database integrity Copy and Rotate pipe segments and update properties Use the Auto Flange command to automate component placement Point Filters to position components Complete the piping model including all connecting components


Component Placement

Summary:


Component Placement


Dec‐09

Additional Components   Overview This module introduces several components and placement routines that can speed the modeling process of complex systems. Branching connections such as tees and olets, provide connections for welded, screwed or socket‐weld pipe.  Valve topworks although placed in association with a valve, are independent components that can be edited separately.  A large collection of s including hangers, s and shoes are also included and accessible from the convenient browser.   In addition to the default set of piping components, AutoPLANT also includes specialty items that are grouped into Component Modules. The Ductile Iron, High Purity and Lined‐pipe   Component Modules, and many others have their own menu and drawing routines, thus speeding up the modeling process.

Prerequisites Students should have a basic understanding of component placement routines for both AutoPLANT Equipment and AutoPLANT Piping components.

Objectives ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

Create a by line on existing pipe run   Create a stub‐in without a fitting Place and edit a handwheel on an existing gate valve Place and edit a  component on a pipe segment Load the Instrument Model and place a specialty component on a pipe segment


Additional Components

Branch Connections

Branch Connections AutoPLANT includes a library of branching connections including tees, crosses, laterals and many types of olets.  For reference, an overview of the basic steps is provided for each type of connection.  The exercises that follow, teach you how to place these types of   components.

Tap Ports For all olet types, a Tap Port is first defined in the pipe segment being tapped to give the olet a connection point.

Note:


Although a Tap Port can be defined independently of the connecting component, it is not recommended.  The graphic representation of a tap port is very small and easily lost in a model.


Dec‐09

Branch Connections

Placing an Independent Tap Port To create an independent tap port, follow these steps:

1. Select Branching Components > Olets > Tap Port.   2. Following the prompts, selecting the pipe to be tapped, the port on the selected pipe, the distance from the selected port, the size and orientation for the tap.

3. If you are placing an olet, such as a weldolet or threadolet, you can create the tap port and place the olet in the same step.

Placing Olets The following method is used to place an olet within a pipe segment. A tap port is created during the placement of an Olet.

1. Select the olet type from Piping > Branching Components > Olets. Relative/Toggle/create taP/Insert/Elev/ :

If different from the default component, select the pipe segment the olet is connected to. Relative/create taP/Elev/ : Type P to create the tap port

2. Locate the tap port. Select the base port Toggle/<Enter to select currently highlighted port>:

If the current port is not the one you want to use as a reference for the tap port, Toggle to that port.  The port will not be accepted until you click Enter. Toggle base port/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance>:

Provide the distance from the reference port to the tap.

3. Size the tap port. The Tap Port Size dialog opens to select the size of the tap port.  When placing olets, the tap port is sized to the diameter of the run pipeline.  This size should be the default choice.

Dec‐09



Branch Connections

4. Orient the tap port. Enter orientation of tap port

Either enter an angle or point your mouse in the direction the olet is to point toward.

5. Specify the branch diameter of the olet. An Olet Specification Selection dialog opens listing all the olets available at the main size defined above.    The olet will place after you click OK to accept your selection.

Placing Elbolets The following method is used to place an elbolet on an elbow.   A tap port is created during the placement of an elbolet.

1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Olets > Elbolet. Relative/Toggle/create taP/Insert/Elev/ :

If different from the default component, select the elbow the olet is connected to. Relative/Toggle/create taP/Insert/Elev/ :

Type P to create the tap port

2. Size the tap port to the diameter of the run pipeline. 3. Orient the tap port. Select the base port Toggle/<Enter to select currently highlighted port>:

The orientation of an elbolet is along the centerline of the elbow port selected in this step.

4. Specify the branch diameter. An Olet Specification Selection dialog will open listing all the olets available at the main size defined above. The elbolet will be created.



Dec‐09

Branch Connections

Placing Latrolets The following method is used to place a latrolet within a pipe segment. A tap port is created during the placement of an Laterolet.

1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Olets > Laterolet. Relative/Toggle/create taP/Insert/Elev/ :

If different from the default component, select the pipe segment the olet is connected to. Relative/Toggle/create taP/Insert/Elev/ :

Type P to create the tap port

2. Locate the tap port. Select the base port Toggle/<Enter to select currently highlighted port>:

If the current port is not the one you want to use as a reference for placing the tap, toggle to that port.  The port will not be accepted until you click Enter again. Toggle base port/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance>:

Provide the distance from the reference port to the tap.

3. Size the tap port to the diameter of the run pipeline. 4. Orient the tap port. Enter orientation of tap port

Either enter an angle or point your mouse in the direction the olet is to point toward.

5. Orient the lateral. Enter orientation of Laterolet

Either enter an angle or point your mouse in the direction of the lateral branch.

6. Specify the branch diameter of the olet. An Olet: Specification Selection dialog will open listing all the olets available at the main size defined above, The laterolet will be created.

Dec‐09



Branch Connections

Î Exercise 1: Create a by line between L1001 and L1002 by inserting the components at the points as shown.

Change to a front view and zoom into the area around L1001 and L1002.

Point 1 ‐ Weldolet 1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Olets > Tap Port. Respond to the prompts to create the Tap Port.   2. Pick component to be tapped. Pick the vertical pipe on line L1001, upstream of the gate valve. 3. A port on the pipe segment is selected. If necessary, toggle to the bottom port of the pipe segment. Click Enter to accept the port. 4. Type a distance of 2’ 6”and press Enter to specify where the tap port will be located. 5. Define the Tap Port size. Select 8”.

Note:

Tap Port size is determined by the pipe being tapped.

6. Enter orientation of tap port. Select –Y from the direction aids toolbar.   7. Select Piping > Branching Components > Olets > Weldolet. 8. Select the pipe segment. The tap port will highlight.   9. Press Enter to accept the port.   10. From the Specification Selection dialog select 8 x 4 {200 x 100} Weldolet.   11. Click OK to place the fitting.



Dec‐09

Branch Connections

Point 2 ‐ Elbow 1. Connect an elbow directly to the weldolet using the fitting to fitting method.   2. Use the direction aids to point the branch in the –X direction.

Point 3 ‐ Flange 1. Connect a flange directly to elbow. 2. Make sure Auto Flange is turned ON in Drawing Preferences, to ensure a mated flange is automatically placed after the valve.

Point 4 ‐ Valve 1. Connect a gate valve with no Top Works, directly to the flange.

3. The flange will automatically place with the valve.

Point 5 ‐ Weldolet 1. Place a second Weldolet in the vertical run of L1002.    2. When prompted, use the Align feature.  Place the second Weldolet aligned with the Weldolet on L1001.

Point 6 ‐ Elbow 1. Connect an elbow directly to the second weldolet using the fitting to fitting method.   2. Use the direction aids to point the branch in the +X direction.

Point 7 ‐ Connecting Pipe 1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe.   Follow the prompts to attach the pipe using the fitting to fitting method.    2. Press Enter to select the highlighted port. 3. Connect to / <Enter Length>:   Type C, and press Enter and pick the open port on the flange next to the valve.   Dec‐09



Branch Connections

Î Exercise 2:  Place an elbolet and pipe segment to construct a base  for line L1002.

1. Select Piping > Branching Components > Olets > Elbolet. 2. Select the elbow. 3. Create the tap by typing P, Press Enter.   4. Size the tap.  Select 8” from the dialog. 5. Select the reference port of the elbow.  If necessary Toggle to select the vertical elbow port.  Press Enter to accept.

6. From the Specification Selection dialog select 8 x 2 BW Elbolet.  Click OK to connect the elbolet to the elbow. The branch will be sized to 2” (50mm).   Complete the  by adding a pipe segment.

7. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe. 8. Press Enter to use the fitting‐to‐fitting command to connect the pipe directly to the elbolet.

9. Type 2’ 6” (750mm), press Enter for the pipe length. 10. Save your model.



Dec‐09

Branch Connections

Placing Stub‐Ins Stub‐ins define how one section of pipe can be directly attached to another pipe segment.

1. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe. Elevation :

Select the segment you want to branch into.

2. Create and locate a tap. create taP/Elevation/Insert/ :

Type P to create the tap. Select the base port Toggle/<Enter to select currently highlighted port>:

If the current port is not the one you want to use as a reference for placing the tap, toggle to that port.  The port will not be accepted until you Press Enter. Toggle base port/Align/change Ref point/<Enter Distance>:

3. Provide the distance between the reference port and the location of the stub‐in. 4. Size the tap to the branch diameter by selecting from the dialog. 5. Orient the tap. Enter orientation of tap port

For an angled branch, you can enter relative placement for the orientation rather than providing an orthogonal value.  For example, in the figure to the right, the orientation entered was 1,‐1,0.

6. Provide the pipe length. Connect to/<Enter Length>:

Dec‐09



Branch Connections

7. Pick a t Selection. The AutoPLANT t Selection dialog allows you to choose how the stub‐in will be connected to the run pipeline.

8. Reinforcing Pad. If you choose a stub in weld with a reinforcing pad, you will be prompted with the Reinforcing Pad Thickness dialog, to provide pad geometry and description.

Pads are drawn as shown.



Dec‐09

Branch Connections

Î Exercise 3: Add a drain line to the existing pipe segment of L1004.    1. Change to the southwest or ISO1 view and Zoom around pump P‐104. 2. Select Piping > Pipe Components > Pipe. Respond to the prompts to define a tap port and place a pipe stub‐in.

3. Pick any point on the pipe segment between the Tee and the Flange on the pump suction line.

4. Type P to define the tap port.   5. If necessary Toggle to the port you want to use as a reference. Press Enter to select the port.

6. Provide the distance by typing CEN and press Enter. Pick a point on the outline of the pipe to define the location of the tap port in the center of the pipe segment.

7. From the Tap Port Size dialog, select 2” {50mm) for the diameter.

8. Type 4” and press Enter for the length of the pipe.   9. Select Stub In ID Weld from the AutoPLANT t Selection and click OK.

Now add a gate valve with no topworks, directly to the pipe segment.

10. Select Piping > Valves > Gate > Gate.   11. Click Cancel for no topworks.   12. Press Enter to place the valve using the fitting‐to‐fitting method.

Dec‐09



Branch Connections

The completed drain will look as shown.

13. Save your model.



Dec‐09

Valve Topworks

Valve Topworks AutoPLANT provides a library of valve operators referred to as topworks.  The library includes components such as cones, chains, wrenches, handwheels and gears. When placing valves, you are automatically prompted to select topworks. (In previous exercises you have clicked Cancel to eliminate topworks.)    You can also add topworks to your model at anytime by activating the Piping > s/Topworks Browser. With the browser open, make a selection from the Topworks tree and pick a valve in the model to insert. While topworks are placed in association with a valve, they are independent components that can be edited and moved separately from the valve.

Dec‐09



Valve Topworks

Placing Simple Topworks Simple topworks, such as a cone, are placed in two steps:

1. Select a valve. Select the component

2. Enter the direction of the control.   Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter rotation or press Return when done>:

Use either letters or Direction Aids. The direction will not be accepted until you press Enter again.

Placing Lever Topworks Topworks with a lever, chain, or other direction‐dependant aspect are placed in three steps:

1. Select a valve. Select the component

2. Enter the direction of the control.   Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter rotation or press Return when done>:

Use either with letters or Direction Aids.    The direction will not be accepted until you press Enter. Up/Down/East/West/North/South/Align/Rotate/reseT/<Enter lever direction or press Return when done>:

3. Enter the lever direction.   Generally the direction is perpendicular to the topworks direction.  The lever direction will not be accepted until you press Enter.



Dec‐09

Valve Topworks

Editing Topworks   Topworks on valves can be placed during valve placement or at a later time. Values for all topworks components can be modified through a graphical dialog.  The Handwheel Operator dialog shown here is simple.

The Rotork Actuator dialog, is more complex.

Dec‐09



Valve Topworks

Most AutoPLANT Piping components cannot be edited after placement.  These components are deleted and redrawn.  However, Topworks can be re‐sized after they have been placed.    After a Topworks has been placed you can use the Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component command to select a topwork component in the drawing.     Once selected edit the values in the dialog.

Î Exercise 1: Place a Handwheel on the gate valve placed on pipeline L1004 as shown below.     For this exercise is it easier to select the valve from the FRONT view.   1. Change to a Front view and ZOOM to pump P‐104. 2. Select Piping > Valves > Topworks Browser. 3. From the expanded menu, double click on Handwheel.   You will be prompted to select the valve.

4. Select the gate valve on P‐104. 5. Enter the following parameters in the dialog. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Diam A

1’ 4”

400

400

Dist B

2’ 6”

750

750

Diam C

3”

80

80

Sort Code

9.0

9.0

9.0

Short Description

TOPWORKS

TOPWORKS

TOPWORKS

Long Description

HANDWHEEL

HANDWHEEL

HANDWHEEL

6. Click OK to place the valve. 7. Enter North rotation.   8. Press Enter to complete the command.



Dec‐09

Valve Topworks

The component should resemble the figure.

9. Select Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component and pick the Handwheel  topworks on the model to display the dialog.

Edits made in the dialog are automatically reflected in the model.

10. Save the model.

Dec‐09



s

s The s Browser is accessed from the Piping > s/Topworks Browser. A large collection of s are grouped by type, including Anchors & Guides, Hangers, Shoes, Base, Misc. s, and  s.  Within these groups, you can find pipe guides, lug attachments, tee shoes, and leg s.

Placing s To place Pipe s follow these steps:

1. Open the s/Topworks Browser. 2. Select the Base  > Base > Elbow . 3. Double click to select the component. 4. Select location of . 5. Provide geometric information in editor dialog. 6. Enter the direction of the . Note:


Some s require an orientation. For example, a s with an asymmetric base need additional rotation.


Dec‐09

s

Î Exercise 1:  Place an elbow  on pipe L1002 as shown.

1. Zoom in to the L1001/L1002 by line.    2. Select Piping > s/Topworks Browser. 3. Double click to select the Base  > Base > Elbow  option. 4. Select the elbow. 5. Type the following geometric data in the dialog. Attribute

Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

Dist A

31.875

797

797

Diam B

2

50

50

Dist C

3

80

80

Dist D

10

250

250

Dist E

6

150

150

Long Description

ELBOW

ELBOW

ELBOW

Short Description

Tag

L1002-SUPPT

L1002-SUPPT

L1002-SUPPT

Follow the command prompts to place the component, using the Direction Aids.

6. Set the direction of the  to –Z.  Press Enter to accept the direction. 7. Set the orientation of the base to +X.  Press Enter to accept the orientation.    8. Press Enter again to end the command.  Save your model.

Dec‐09



s

Editing s Most s have geometric data that can be edited from a dialog.  Like topworks, you can access a  dialog with the Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component command. Some  dialogs are basic, while some are quite detailed.



Dec‐09

Component Modules

Component Modules In addition to the default set of components used during a modeling session, AutoPLANT also provides specialized components grouped together with their own drawing routines, command prompts, menus and specifications, know as Component Modules. These modules are loaded as needed, giving the  access to specific set of components without being distracted by those not needed. These modules are loaded in each modeling session. The Piping Component Modules shipped with the application can be viewed from Piping > Setup > Module Setup. More than one module may be loaded in the same drawing session.

Once loaded, the menu is added to the interface. Toolbars are included to speed the modeling process.

Dec‐09



Component Modules

Loading Component Modules To load one module: 1. Open the Module Setup dialog. 2. Select the module from the Available Modules list. 3. Select Load Module. 4. Click OK to add the menu to the AutoCAD menu bar.

To load multiple modules: 1. Open the Module Setup dialog. 2. Select the module from the Available Modules list. 3. Select Load Module. 4. Click Apply. 5. The menu is added to the AutoCAD menu bar. 6. Select the next module. 7. Click Apply. 8. Continue until all modules are loaded. 9. Click OK. ƒ

To unload one or multiple modules, follow the instructions above, but use the Unload Module Action.

ƒ

All modules can be loaded or unloaded with the Load All Modules and Unload All Modules actions.

ƒ

After loading a Module, you will be able to select the specification in your Drawing Preferences dialog and Component Preferences control.

ƒ

Although the AutoPLANT Fundamentals course does not use the Component Modules, the following exercise is intended to expose you to this functionality.



Dec‐09

Component Modules

Challenge Exercise Î Exercise 1: Load the Instrument module and insert a specialty item into a pipe segment.

1. Load the Instrument Module following the steps listed above.  The Instrument /Specialty Item menu appears.

2. Place a 6” (150mm) diameter, I_150LB (M_150LB, MM_150LB) pipe segment, of any length somewhere in your model, preferably outside the structure area.

3. Select Instrument/Specialty Items > Orifice Components > Orifice Flange Set   4. For the first flange, the location within the segment as well as the insertion and alignment points are up to you.

5. After the first flange is placed, the Orifice Plate dialog opens.

6. This dialog, allows you to change the plate thickness, create a Tag for the plate, and change the Long Description of the plate.  Click OK. The orifice plate, second flange, and bolts place automatically. You can keep or delete the new segment with the orifice flange set.    You can also unload the Instrument Module if you wish.

7. Clean your database Piping > Database Tools > Clean Database.   8. Save your model. You have now completed the exercises for this module.

Dec‐09



Module Review

Module Review Now that you have completed this model, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions: 1. When creating a by line directly from an existing pipe segment, you would used a weldolet.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. s for pipe lines can be made from a section of pipe and an olet or elbolet.

ƒ ƒ

True False

3. Stub‐in requires the use of an olet.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Valve topworks can be added to your model at any time.

ƒ ƒ

True False

5. s for piping segments are all added by the same method.

ƒ ƒ

True False

6. A Piping Module provides additional drawing routines and menus of specialty components.

ƒ ƒ

True False



Dec‐09

Module Review

Answers: 1. True: By lines that are being created on a 90 degree angle from an existing pipe line can use a simple weldolet for connection to the pipe.

2. True: Simple pipe s can be attached to a section of pipe using either an olet or an elbolet. Elbolets are used when attaching to an elbo. Simple olets are attached to pipe sections when the angle is 90 degrees.

3. False: A stub‐in is a section of pipe that is welded directly to another pipe. These types of connections are typically made as branch connections where the added pipe diameter is the same or smaller than the main pipe section.

4. True: A valve can be placed into a model with or without the topworks or operators. All topworks can also be edited independently from the valve body.

5. False: When placing s, althougth placements procedures are similar, asymmetrical s require an orientation. The Direction Aids toolbar provides and quick method of setting the orientation of the .

6. True: Specialty components, along with their own menus and drawing routines are provided as Component Modules. The High Purity module is an example that provides Triclover type fittings.

Dec‐09



Summary:


ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Create a by line on existing pipe run   Create a stub‐in without a fitting Place and edit a handwheel on an existing gate valve Place and edit a  component on a pipe segment Load the Instrument Model and place a specialty component on a pipe segment



Dec‐09

Routing Options   Overview AutoPLANT provides multiple methods and tools for making the task of routing pipe segments faster and more efficient.  By creating intelligent centerlines you gain flexibility when deg elaborate pipe runs with rolled and sloping pipe. You can also create an intelligent centerline from an existing component. Once components are placed, the connectivity between components is checked for accuracy.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should have a good understanding of the common pipe placement functions.

Objectives ƒ ƒ ƒ

Understand the concepts of the Auto Router mode Create a smart centerline from an existing component Run the Connectivity Checker against your pipe runs

Dec‐09


Routing Options

Auto Router Mode

Auto Router Mode Auto Router Mode is a Drawing Preference setting.  If you are routing a line consisting of consecutive components (for example elbow, pipe segment, tee, pipe segment) Auto Router Mode will automatically connect the component you are placing to the one just placed. When working in Auto Router Mode, after the first component has been placed, you will only be prompted for the following information for pipe, elbows and tees. Component Pipe Segment Elbow Tee

Prompt

Possible Input

Length Direction of Port 2

Up, Down, East, West, North, South, Align, Rotate

Insertion Point Orientation of Branch, or Direction of Run.

Up, Down, East, West, North, South, Align, Rotate

When placing valves and flanges, you may be prompted by a Specification Selection dialog. While Auto Router Mode can make line routing much faster, it is primarily used for the more common types of pipe runs.   Additional routing methods described in the following topics add powerful functionality when routing complex piping systems.

Routing Options


Dec‐09

Centerline Routers

Centerline Routers AutoPLANT Piping provides several methods for creating an intelligent centerline that can be used to create a three‐dimensional pipeline.  The advantage of creating a smart centerline allows the  to quickly create complex piping systems including rolls and slopes.

From Dialog: is the most versatile router. It provides a dialog interface for changing elevations, specifying slope parameters, and otherwise controlling the construction of the centerline. Centerline routing from this dialog provides access to several routing tools to define the piping path. This router also enables you to indicate whether or not you want to make the centerline intelligent (i.e., associating the main size, line number, specification, insulation thickness, and insulation spec values with the line). From Points: presents a command line interface for routing from specific points. After the command is executed, the Centerline Preferences dialog is displayed for the setting of the main size, line number, specification, and insulation thickness and insulation spec values associated with the centerline. From Polyline: enables you to convert an existing AutoCAD polyline into an intelligent piping centerline. AutoCAD's PLINE command may be used to route a centerline, then the From Dec‐09


Routing Options

Centerline Routers

Polyline command may be executed on the polyline to convert it to an intelligent piping centerline. From File: enables you to define a centerline's geometry in an external text file. This option enables you to select a centerline file to draw the line and associate intelligence. From Components: enables you to generate centerlines from existing components. For example, you may insert a series of components and then realize that you want to redo the line. You can generate centerlines from these components, delete the existing components that lie on these centerlines, then use the centerlines to make insertion of the replacement components easier. The exercises that follow illustrate how to complete a pipe run using the following methods:

ƒ ƒ

From Dialog From Polyline

From Dialog   This exercise teaches you how to use the Box Router to route connecting pipe and components.

Î Exercise 1: Using the From Dialog option, you will route connecting pipe from the outlet nozzle on VH‐45 to the Pump P‐104. The flange on VH‐45‐N2 and the straight tee on P‐104 were placed in previous exercises. Change to an ISO2 or southeast view and Zoom to the area as shown.   In the Component Preferences dialog, make sure LineNumber L1004 is active.

Routing Options


Dec‐09

Centerline Routers

1. Select Piping > Piping Tools > Centerline Routers > From Dialog. 2. When the Router Info dialog displays, ensure that the Info Mode ON switch is enabled, and then click OK.

3. The Centerline Preferences dialog is displayed.  Set the Size to 8" {200mm} and Line Number to L1004.

4. Click OK. Use the CENTER OSNAP to draw a temporary routing box around the flange and tee. The box provides a routing path to enable you to complete the routing line.   Respond to the prompts:

5.

Exit/ /Start Point:

Type CEN and press Enter. Pick the weld end of the flange on VH‐45.

6.

Exit/ /Start Point:

Press Enter to display the Routing dialog.

Dec‐09


Routing Options

Centerline Routers

7. Select Box Router Pick. Click OK. Pick End Point of Box

8. Type CEN.  Press Enter and then pick the open port of the tee. Press Enter. A temporary routing box displays as shown.

The side of the box highlighted in yellow indicates the current route for the first segment of the piping run. You can change the segment by pressing Enter to execute the default Next option.   For this exercise you want the first segment to move in a vertical direction away from the flange.

9. Press Enter until the vertical segment is highlighted.  Type K and press Enter to keep the segment.

10. The next segment is highlighted. Continue to press Enter to select your second segment.   Type K and press Enter to keep the second segment.

11. Repeat the procedure for the final segment connecting to the Tee.   12. Type E and press Enter to complete the pipe run.   Routing Options


Dec‐09

Centerline Routers

13. Type E and press Enter to end the command.   Now that you have created a centerline, you can place the elbows at each turn by selecting the routing line as the pick point.

14. Select Piping > Bends and Returns > 90 LR Elbow To automatically insert an elbow, use the END OSNAP and pick near the intersection of the line segments. The function interprets the orientation from the geometry of the routing line to place the correct elbow.

Note:

Note:   Before you place the elbows set the Size to 8" (200mm) and Line Number to L1004 in the Project Preferences dialog.

When you have placed the two elbows at the turns in the piping path, use the AutoPipe function to add the pipe segments.

15. Select Piping > Pipe Components > AutoPipe.   Use the manual method to select your objects and complete the pipe run.

16. Save the model. Dec‐09


Routing Options

Centerline Routers

From Polyline If you have an AutoCAD line or polyline in your model, you can use it to place piping components.  The AutoCAD line has no intelligence, therefore you need to insure the settings in the Component Preferences control are correct for the items you are placing. The Piping > Piping Tools > Centerline Routers > From Polyline command lets you create intelligent centerlines from AutoCAD lines.   Components placed on the centerline will collect the line number, specification, and diameter of the pipe. Elbows and tees place without any prompting for direction or orientation. Pipe segments can be created manually or by using use the AutoPipe command.

Î Exercise 2: Using the AutoCAD Line tool, create the lines shown below. 1. First delete the pipe and components on L1004 created during the previous exercise. 2. Using AutoCAD Line, create three lines: LINE 1: From center of north face of tee to distance past nozzle VH‐45‐N2. LINE 2: From flange on VH‐45‐N2 down past elevation of LINE 1. LINE 3: Perpendicular to both LINE 1 and LINE 2.

3. Using the Trim command, cut the lines back as shown below by the dotted lines.

Routing Options


Dec‐09

Centerline Routers

4. Select Piping > Piping Tools > Centerline Routers > From Polyline and set the Centerline Preferences to Line Number L1004 and Size to 8” (200mm).

5. Select the three AutoCAD lines.   The lines are now drawn on the L1004_CL layer and contain the settings from the Centerline Preferences dialog.

6. Manually place elbows at the line intersections. 7. Use the AutoPipe command to complete L1004. 8. Save the model.

Dec‐09


Routing Options

Connectivity Checking

Connectivity Checking The connectivity checking tools enable you to confirm proper connectivity along piping runs.   The most common reason for improper connections is that one port of a component is not connected. This can be intentional.  Another cause of incomplete connectivity is moving or copying components without establishing connectivity at the new locations.

Note:

Note:   The Piping application generates connectivity during the AutoPipe process, in Auto Router Mode, while placing components fitting‐to‐fitting, and when you use the Connect‐to option when placing pipe segments.  Also , the Clean Database command does not erase active connection points.

Proper connectivity is important because these connections are used for:

ƒ ƒ ƒ

component placement and editing in future design sessions the production of isometrics accurate dimensional annotation

Connectivity Checker Commands The Piping > Piping Tools > Connectivity Checker menu has three commands:  Checker, Resume Checker, and Check Run After selecting any command, you will be prompted with an AutoPLANT Selections dialog to define which components are to be checked.

After the check completes, you will be alerted to any errors in connectivity.    If there were no errors, you will be reminded that components in your selection may be attached to components outside of your selection.  Those connections were not tested and will not be reported.

Routing Options


Dec‐09


If there are errors, the Connectivity Check dialog opens and your active viewport zooms to the first disconnect. This figure shows an intentional disconnect at the end of a pipe run.

Other options allow you to zoom in and repair any disconnects. The More mode gives you additional options including disconnect information.   When working in “More Mode,” you can jump to the First or Last disconnect in addition to scrolling through each one.   You can Suspend the checker to work in the model without losing the check results.    To return to Connectivity Check execute the Piping > Piping Tools > Connectivity Checker > Resume Checker command. To return to the compact version of the Connectivity Check dialog, click Brief.

Check Run This option allows you to check a series of components that should be connected.  Select the first component of the run and scroll through the rest of the components.  If you encounter a disconnect, the command will exit. Watch the command prompts while performing a check on a pipe run.

1. Select objects: Using the AutoPLANT Selections dialog, select the component run to be checked.

2. Select the starting component such as one of the end components of the run. 3. When starting a new branch, select Done/Enter to continue to connected component. 4. Click Enter to move to the next component. 5. Click Done to exit the check.

Dec‐09


Routing Options


Components If a weld or other connection has been lost or was never created, you can  the two components using the  Components command.  You will be prompted for the first component and then the second component.    Once the  Components command has been executed, AutoPLANT looks for every possible  between every port of the first component and every port of the second component. In most cases, you will not need to provide any more information for the  to complete.   However, two situations exist that will require further input.

1. Depending on your spec, you may be prompted for a t Selection.    This will happen only if multiple t options qualify for the selected components.

2. If the t contains a reinforcing pad, you will be prompted for the pad geometry.    If AutoPLANT cannot determine what type of t to use, you will be alerted with the   Components Results dialog that will tell you why each combination of component ports failed.    Common causes for t failure include physical impossibility of connections and gaps between components that are larger than a weld will allow.

Î Exercise 1: Run the Connectivity Checker on all of the components of line L1001. 1. Select Piping > Piping Tools > Connective Tools > Checker. 2. You can also use the Advanced Selection of the AutoPLANT Selections dialog to make selection more specific.

Routing Options


Dec‐09


If you have created your model accurately, you should only have one intentional disconnect.‐ the flanged at the end of L1001.

Î Exercise 2. Run the Connectivity Checker on L1002, including the by line and elbow pipe .

Î Exercise 3: Use Check Run for L1004 and  Components for any breaks. Your model should resemble the one shown below.

to Save your model.   This completes the exercises in this module.

Dec‐09


Routing Options

Module Review


Questions 1. Lines drawing in native AutoCAD can be used for placement of AutoPLANT components. True False

2. The Centerline Router dialog gives you an easy method to route pipelines.   True False

3. All AutoCAD polylines are intelligent.   True False

4. Connectivity is established when using the Auto Router mode. True False

5. The Connectivity Checker always checks connections between all components in your model. True False

6. If the connectivity checker has reported a disconnect, you must wait until the checker has completed the run.   True False

7. A quick method for repairing a lost component connections is to use the   Components command.   True False

Routing Options


Dec‐09

Answers 1. True:  AutoCAD lines or polylines can be used to place components. A straight tee placed at an intersection needs no further placement information.

2. True: When using the Centerline Router dialog interface, the direction, distance and slope between vertices is controlled. Attributes are easily defined from selections provided for you.

3. False: When first created an AutoCAD polyline has not intelligence. You can covert a native AutoCAD polyline to an intelligent centerline by selecting the From Polyline command.

4. True: Proper connectivity between components is established when using Auto Router mode, components placed fitting‐to‐fitting and when using Connect‐to options.

5. False: When using the Connectivity Checker you must first specify which components you want to check. Any components outside of your selection set will not be tested.

6. False: If you are working in More mode of the Connectivity Check tool, you can suspend the checker to work on the model without losing any check results.

7. True: When connections between components have been lost or were never created, the  Components command allows you to automatically  the components. If the automated process does not work you will be alerted as the reason why a  has not been created.

Dec‐09


Routing Options

Summary

Summary ƒ ƒ ƒ

Understand the concepts of the Auto Router mode Create a smart centerline from an existing component Run the Connectivity Checker against your pipe runs

Routing Options


Dec‐09

Reporting Tools   Overview The AutoPLANT Piping tools provide advanced functionality for creating representations of your model, including 2D, 3D, single or double line. Other tools manipulate components, including mending pipe segments, or moving and rotating components.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should have an understanding of the basic component placement concepts

ƒ

Students should be familiar with the tools and component libraries

Objectives ƒ

Set the display properties of model components

ƒ

Rotate a pipe segment about a connected port

ƒ

View database records for selected components

ƒ

Create a Bill of Materials in drawing and report type format

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Piping Tools Menu

Piping Tools Menu This module covers display controls and component manipulation tools in the Piping > Piping Tools menu.  With these commands you can create “dumb” AutoCAD drawings, change your display mode and manipulate how specific AutoPLANT components are displayed. Additional information can be found in the on‐line help at AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Piping Tools Menu.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Graphic Preferences

Graphic Preferences Piping > Piping Tools > Graphic Preferences This command displays the AutoCAD Options dialog, with the PDW Graphics tab active. Graphic preferences used in AutoPLANT may be defined in this dialog.

ƒ

Set Display Mode

ƒ

Set the graphic used for clipped pipelines

ƒ

Set the break symbol used when breaking pipe

ƒ

Set the Torus Centerline Style

ƒ

Change centerline properties such as color and Linetype

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Representations

Representations In the AutoPLANT Equipment Fundamentals course, you learn how to create native AutoCAD duplicates of your model components.  The components in this type of drawing have no AutoPLANT intelligence. In the Equipment application, the options enable you to create a 2D View, 3D Mesh, or 3D ACIS of your active viewport.    The Piping > Piping Tools > Representations command opens the AutoPLANT Representations dialog.

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

You can select 3D or 2D as well as Double line or Single line options.    You can turn On or Off the active components the representation is based on Redraw or Delete the current representation   Change the layer the representation will be drawn on.

Once you have established your settings, you execute your drawing with either the ACIS, Mesh, or 2D View buttons and select Done.

Note:

You are encouraged to change your current drawing layer so that new graphics will not be drawn on your modeling layers.

You will be prompted with an AutoPLANT Selections dialog for selecting the components you want to include in your drawing.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Component Manipulation Tools

Component Manipulation Tools The Component Manipulation Tools menu provide advanced functionality for working with piping components.  All of the following commands can be accessed from the Piping > Piping Tools > Component Manipulation Tools menu.

Components This command connects two coincident components such as connecting a copied pipeline to the open end of another pipeline. Flanges and other components that are not coincident cannot be connected with this command.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Component Manipulation Tools

Move Components The Move Components command works similar to the AutoCAD Move command.  However, when you select a component as the base point, AutoPLANT Move will prompt you to toggle to the port of the component that is to act as the point of displacement.

Align Components The Align Components command offers you a quick way to align components in your model. You will be prompted to select the components to align. Once selected you are required to pick a base point. The Toggle option allows you to move to the desired port on the component you would like to align. Next you will be prompted to pick the component you want to align to. The Toggle is used again to select the desired alignment port. The components are then moved to align with the selected port.

Insert Components This command allows you to move and fit components to other components in the drawing without having to delete and redraw the component or use the  Components command.

Rotate Components When you use the Rotate Components command, the point of rotation is set to one of the ports of the component being rotated.  The axis of rotation is defined as the centerline of that component at that port.

Delete Components The difference between AutoCAD Erase and the AutoPLANT Delete Components command is that the AutoPLANT command will remove all of the attachments associated with the selected components. If you use the AutoCAD Erase command, make sure to clean the database.

Mend Components If you delete an inline component, such as a gate valve from a placed pipe segment, you are left with a break in the segment.  The Mend Components replaces the broken line segment.

Delete and Mend Components If you are deleting components other than pipe segments, elbows, or tees, the Delete and Mend Components command combines the two commands into one step.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

AutoCAD Copy Command

AutoCAD Copy Command AutoPLANT does not have a specific copy command.  The AutoCAD Copy command can be used to copy components.   However, there are specific rules to follow so copied objects are recognized by AutoPLANT and the project database.

Note:

Never press the Esc key to end the copy command. Always press Enter or Space‐bar to end the command.  When the copy command is complete, AutoPLANT will run a post copy routine that will create unique component identities in the drawing and database for the copied objects.

In the next exercise you will use the AutoCAD Copy command to complete the pipe run and connecting components on the second pump P‐124.

Î Exercise 1:  Copy piping objects in Pipeline L1004   1. From a plan view zoom into pump P‐104

1. Initiate AutoCAD Copy.    2. Select the flange, valve, pipe and tee on pump P‐104. 3. Pick a reference point at the CEN of the tee.   4. With Ortho On  move your cursor in a north direction and enter a distance of  9’‐3” 5. Press Enter or Space‐Bar to end copy command Dec‐09


Reporting Tools


6. The Update Component dialog should appear.  This dialog will allow you to change project object properties, line number, area, unit, etc.

7. Press OK button to close the dialog.   Notice on the Command line that there is a post process after the Copy command has ended establishing the uniqueness to the newly copied objects. Rebis post-copy/explode component update in progress... Retrieving copied components... Updating database links... Re-establishing connectivity... Updating component data... 23 components updated.

Note:

If you pressed the Esc button to end the copy command, there will be a *Cancel* on the command line at the end of copy.  The post copy routine will not run and the objects will not be unique.  The result will show objects but AutoPLANT will see them as the original.  Even though there are two images of each component on your drawing, they will not produce any information on the material list or be recognized by Isogen.

Your completed model should resemble the figure.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09


Control C and Control V Ctrl>C and Ctrl>V is disabled in the Piping and equipment modules.  Because of limitation in buffer size, the routine will not run.  The following Command Error appears whenever there is an attempt to  the commands.

Always use AutoCAD Copy.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Change Size/Change Spec Utility

Change Size/Change Spec Utility The Piping > Piping Tools >Change Size/Change Spec utility enables you make changes in size and spec to a selection of components in your model.

A New Session is created by selecting the components using the AutoPLANT Selections dialog.  The selected components are listed in the dialog. Size and Spec changes can be made in the dialog. The new components are then inserted back into the model, using the original component class, location, connection information, line number, service and insulation. Multiple Sessions can be created and saved to be used repeatedly. This can be useful for component groups that may be hard to select or for processes that are still in active design. The session currently in use, is listed in the Session Name drop down list.  The active session can be purged by clicking on the Delete Session dialog.

Note:

After a Change Size/Change Spec transaction has been completed, it is important that you ensure all connections have been maintained and minor components accurately updated.

Dismantled Components Field The list of components in this field have not been altered.  As you create the session, new components are added to the list by clicking on the Dismantle button and selecting the components using the AutoPLANT Selections dialog. The list of components can be sorted by any of the columns by clicking on the column header.  The Anchor attribute determines if the component can be relocated to accommodate changes to the group.  By default, elbows and tees are anchored. Changes in Spec or Size are made by selecting the new value in the corresponding drop down list. Using shift‐select or ctrl‐select, changes the active value for all of the selected components. Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Change Size/Change Spec Utility

To preview the changes made to Spec, Size, or Anchor status, select the altered components and click on the Insert button.  The Insert command runs the placement command for the changed component.

Note:

If the Insertion Mode is set to Auto Insert, you will only be prompted for Specification Selection on components that have multiple choices for the changes made.  The Prompt Insert Mode closes the Change Size/Change Spec dialog and prompts for placement as described in the Component Placement section of this course.

Once the Insert command is completed, the altered components will be removed from the Dismantled Components grid and placed in the Rebuilt Components grid with the status set to Rebuilt. You can easily delete components from the Dismantled Components grid. This will move the component to the Rebuilt Components grid with the status set to Deleted. To remove a component from the Change Size/Change Spec group, select it and click on the Restore button. At this point, none of the changes you have made are irreversible.

Rebuilt Components Field Components that have been changed are listed in the Rebuilt Components field with the new size and/or spec value.  For changes that would result in a change in the graphic representation, that change is made for preview purposes.  Changes made in the dialog are not final until the Apply Session button has been used. To undo changes made to a component, select it in the Rebuilt Components grid and click on the UnRebuild button.  This will return the component to its original configuration in the Dismantled Components grid and in the representation. As with dismantled components, rebuilt components can be selected graphically by clicking on the Pick button. To accept the changes indicated in the Rebuilt Components grid, click on the Apply Session button and acknowledge that the command cannot be un‐done. You can close the Bentley Change Size/Change Spec Utility dialog without applying the changes AND without losing the configuration of the session by clicking on the Close button.

Attachments and s Attachment and  components, such as topworks, are not included in the Dismantled Components grid.  Rather, if the parent component is selected, the child components will appear in the Attachments and s grid.  Changes made to the parent component will initiate the change process for the child.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Database Tools The database tools menu provides specialized functions to enable you to view and modify component data stored in the database.  Changes you make to the database are reflected in your model.   The following exercises demonstrate some of these commands.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Edit Component After a component is placed in a model, many attributes can be modified by editing the record associated with the component. As a general rule, dimension and position data may not be modified.   Follow these steps to edit a component in your model:

Î Exercise 1:  Edit the information for a component. 1. Select Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component. 2. Select a component.   Note:

You can also double‐click on an AutoPLANT Piping component to activate the command. If the command is activated by this method, the AutoCAD properties dialog will open once the Edit Component command is complete.  To disable the command, set the ACAD environment variable DBLCLKEDIT to OFF, or the ACAD variable PICKFIRST to 0.

3. The first page of the dialog contains the most commonly used database information.   The fields vary with the type of component selected.    Changes can only be made to the information in the white fields.

4. Place the cursor in the desired field and edit the value.



5. Clicking OK accepts any edits.   6. Changes made in this dialog will update the respective field information in the drawing database.

Note: Dec‐09

Press Cancel to abort any edits made.


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

7. Press Next Page to display the second page.   This page displays component position and port information. It also provides a list of all database record field values.    These fields can also be edited.

8. DO NOT edit any of the fields at this time.   Note:

This exercise is only intended to get you familiar with data records.

9. Click OK to close the dialog.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Update Components There are times when you will need to change a single value, or set of values, for a group of components already placed in the model. The Piping > Database Tools > Update Components command is more efficient than editing each component manually.   For example a design change may require you to change a selected component groups Line Number. In the following exercise, you will change the line number for the pipe run connecting the pumps to the horizontal vessel.

Î Exercise 3: Change LineNumber L1004 to L1009 1. Select Piping > Database Tools > Update Components. The AutoPLANT Selections dialog is displayed.

2. Define the query by selecting L1004 from the Attribute Value field.   3. Click Add to build the query.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

4. The Update Component dialog displays.

5. In the Edit Value field, select L1009 from the drop down menu.   The line number has been created for this project.

Note:

A new line number can also be created. This task is generally performed by the Project .

6. Click OK.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Updating Component Preferences When you change Component Properties during an update, you need to add the new attributes to the Component Preferences control.  The Piping > Setup > Component Update Preferences command opens the same Component Field Selection dialog used to add attributes to the Component Copy Preferences.

Î Exercise 4: Add Component Properties. 1. Select Piping > Setup > Component Update Preferences. 2. Select the properties for any additions you have made from the fields list. 3. Click Add.   4. Click OK. 5. Save the model.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Spec Browser The Spec Browser, Piping > Database Tools > Spec Browser, is a utility application that enables you to browse through the currently active specification, down to individual component records. Once selected, the component can be “dragged” into the model giving you an alternative method of placing components. Since the browser only allows you to select and insert components listed in your project specification, spec selection errors are greatly reduced.

Note:

Use of this utility application is covered extensively in a Specification Generator course.

The default spec record for each size is highlighted in green in the right pane. This record will be used if you enable the Default Spec Choice switch in the Drawing Preferences dialog. If this switch is disabled, then AutoPLANT will display the Specification Selection dialog to enable you to select between spec records of the same size and type, but have different end conditions, schedules, ratings.   Red text color indicates there are multiple classes using the same general/sub type combination.  Only the components of the named class are listed.    When you Double‐click on a spec record in the data grid to insert the selected component, the component will be inserted based on the SYS_ID of the spec record.   When you right‐click in either pane, a context menu displays enabling you to customize your selection to suit your needs.   Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

For more information on Spec Browser go to the Online Help.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Update From Spec The Update From Spec tools allows you to synchronize your model to an updated specification.  As installed, AutoPLANT only allows for descriptive attributes to be updated.    This functionality is beyond the scope of this course and is included in the AutoPLANT training course.   Advanced Specification Generator training is also recommended before using the Update From Spec functionality.

Clean Database A record is written to the external drawing database each time a piping component is placed. If you delete the components drawing process, the records remain in the database until there are removed using the Clean Database command. This command lets you reconcile the components in the model with the matching database records. You can select the options prior to running the command.

Once the command has run, you will be notified how many records were reconciled.

Note:

Reporting Tools

You should make it standards practice to clean the database frequently during the modeling process and before generating reports. Otherwise a report may contain items that are not in the model, but still exist as a record in the database.


Dec‐09

Database Tools

View Database The Piping > Database Tools >View Database command displays the database records for a selected set of components. From this command you can select a component, automatically Zoom to the component in the model and make modifications directly to the component records.    Follow these steps:

1. Select Piping > Database Tools >View Database. 2. From the AutoPLANT Selections dialog, define and run a query for the selection.    3. The Database View dialog displays the results.

4. Select a component from the list and click Go To.    Your active viewport Zooms to the selected component.

5. The Edit button functions the same as the Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component command allowing you to make changes to the component record.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Database Information The Database Information dialog gives basic information about the Project, Document, Temporary Database and View.  Go to Piping > Database Tools > Database Information.

Note:

The temporary database is the one created by AutoPLANT for the modeling session.  You are not constantly accessing a network for database information which greatly improves performance.

Active Connections The Piping > Database Tools > Active Connections opens the Current Database Connections dialog and lists all of the temporary databases you are currently connected to.  You should only be connected to the database listed in the Database Information dialog described above. You can disconnect from all other databases from this dialog.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Report Generation The AutoPLANT Report Generator utility is used by all AutoPLANT Plant Design applications to generate reports that can be output to a printer, a file or displayed on screen in preview mode.

The Report Generator uses Seagate Software's® Crystal Reports™ run‐time engine to process the component data for your report. AutoPLANT provides multiple Crystal Reports (*.RPT ) files already formatted for your use.

Note:

Dec‐09

You cannot edit the provided report files or create new files without purchasing the Crystal Reports software directly from Seagate.


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

When you create a report: 1. The Report Generator extracts the component records from the database and saves them  to a temporary database. 2. The temporary database is cleaned to remove any records for components that no longer exist in the drawing.  In AutoPLANT Piping, the pipe cut lengths are also recalculated.   3. The Report Writer extracts the data from the temporary database and processes the selected report file.

Bill of Materials To place a bill of material output on your drawing, the Piping > Reports > Bill of Materials command compiles the data you specify.   While this report type works in the Piping application, it is intended more for drawing production and is covered more thoroughly in the AutoPLANT Drawing Production Fundamentals module.

The contents of a BOM placed on a drawing is similar to the information in a BOM report. Column order and spacing have been formatted to fit the drawing.   For additional information on the Bill of Materials go to your Online help at AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Reports Menu > Bill of Materials.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Generating a Bill of Materials Reports To generate a Bill of Material type report select Piping > Reports > Generate Reports.

You can create or edit Report Types by clicking Configure. In the Report Type Configuration dialog you can enter a new Type, provide a Description, and define the Database and Table types. Report Names are created and edited in the Report Definitions dialog that opens when you click Configure.    The Piping report files are located in the %NETWORK_ROOT%\Reports directory.  The following table summarizes the contents of each report file.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Report File Name

Provided Report Name

Description

bombrief.rpt

BRIEF

Part Number, Component Description, Size, and Quantity

bydocument.rpt

BY DOCUMENT

Line Number, Service, Part Number, Schedule, SType, GType, Component Description, Specification, Size, Item Code, and Quantity grouped by document

byline.rpt

BY LINENUMBER

Part Number, Schedule, SType, GType, Component Description, Size, Item Code, and Quantity grouped by line number

cablelengths.rpt

CABLE LENGTHS

Part Number, Cable Tag No., Component Description, Nominal Size, Item Code and Approx. Cable Length

Cable tray mto.rpt

CABLE TRAY MTO

Part Number, Component Description, Spec., Item Code, Radius, Nominal Size and Quantity

COG

Generates a report with weights and COG of Dry Pipe Line (assumes no fluid in the pipeline).

COMBINED COG

Generate a report with weights and COG of both Dry and partially/fully filled Pipe Line side by side.

OPERATIONAL COG

Generate a report with weights and Center of Gravity (COG) of partially/fully filled Pipe Line.

CUSTOM

Generates a custom bill of reports.

CUT LENGTHS

Part Number, Schedule, GType, SType, Component Description, Specification, Size, Item Code, and Quantity – with cut length of pipes

CUT LENGTHS SHOP/FIELD

Part Number, Schedule, Component Description, Specification, Size, and Quantity grouped by Shop or Field

DESIGNER

Part Number, Quantity – with cut length of pipes, Size, and Component Description

Spool.rpt

SPOOL

Part Number, Schedule, Component Description, Specification, Size, Item Code, Quantity, and Length grouped by Spool

spcutln.rpt

SPOOL CUT LENGTHS ONLY

Part Number, Schedule, Component Description, Specification, Size, Quantity, and Length grouped by Line Number and Schedule

spooltot.rpt

SPOOL TOTAL

Cog.rpt

Combcog.rpt

Operationalcog.rpt

Bomcust.rpt cutlen.rpt

sfcutlen.rpt

bomdes.rpt

Part Number, Schedule, Component Description, Specification, Size, Item Code, Quantity, and Length. Pipe lengths and welds subtotaled by Line Number and Schedule followed by remaining components

bomstand.rpt

STANDARD

Part Number, Schedule, SType, GType, Component Description, Specification, Size, Item Code, and Quantity – with accumulated length of pipe

Valveloc.rpt

VALVE LOCATIONS

Generates a BOM report that illustrates the capability of the Report Generator to include data in tables other than the project’s PIPING table in reports. This report includes data from the PORT3D table.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

Note:

Long Descriptions are used in the Component Description columns. This table does NOT include the report files for the Bill of Material Reports intended for drawing production.

Output Options The Options section of the AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog provides filtering, formatting, and ordering options for your report.

ƒ

Omit Sort Codes:  AutoPLANT specifications include a Sort Code field as another means of organizing data.  In the installed AutoPLANT specifications, components such as welds and bolts have Sort Code values of 100 or greater; therefore, by omitting sort codes greater than 99, you can keep those component types out of your reports.

ƒ

Ignore Existing Components:  The component database field EXISTING indicates if a component is existing or not in brown‐field projects.  Turning on this switch will filter all components labeled as existing from your report.

ƒ

Clean Database Fasteners:  This switch will clean the model database of extraneous fasteners, keeping them from being included in your report.

ƒ

Previous Selection:  This switch will use the same component set selected used for the last report run, presuming you did not close the AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog between reports.  This switch will ignore changes to other output options.

ƒ

Material Tag Options controls how material tags are placed on a drawing.  This functionality only applies when used with the Isometrics or Auto‐Iso applications.   These applications require an additional license.

ƒ

Append Topworks Description:  This switch will add the topworks description to the end of the valve’s description.  This can be useful if topworks are being filtered out of the report by their Sort Code.

ƒ

Append Pipe End Preparations:  This will add pipe end preparation data to the end of the pipe description.

ƒ

Ascending SORT_CODE Order:  By default, components are listed by Sort Code in descending order.  This is how pipe, with a Sort Code of 17, is listed before weldneck flanges, that have a Sort Code of 1.  This switch will reverse the sort to ascending order.

Imperial, Metric, Mixed Metric Reports The Crystal Reports Engine can convert units. Your final report output can be created in Imperial, Metric, and Mixed Metric units with precision set to your choice. Output can be viewed on the screen, sent directly to a printer, or saved in various file types. A full description of the AutoPLANT Report Generator can be found in the Online help.  Go to AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Reports Menu > Report Generator.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Î Exercise 1:  Create a Brief Bill of Material Report. 1. Open Piping.dwg.   2. Select Piping>Reports>Generate Reports.

3. Set Report Type to BOM. 4. Set Report Name to BRIEF. Notice the Report file is set to the proper .rpt file.  This can be configured from one project to the next.

5. In Options set Omit Sort Codes> to 0. Check Ignore Existing Components. Check Clean Database Fasteners.

6. In Output select Preview. 7. Click OK. 8. The AutoPLANT Selection dialog appears.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Database Tools

9. Select the Drawing tab. 10. Select All.   11. Click OK.  The result shows the material list in preview mode.    From the menu options, you can print or export to other programs.

Note:

Due to the length of this report, the following example has been trimmed to fit.

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Database Tools

Î Exercise 2 : Create a Brief Bill of Materials omitting all sort codes greater than 99. Follow the example from Exercise 1.   A sample of the report in shown below.

This exercise completes the module.

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09

Module Review


Questions: 1. Specific AutoPLANT graphics display properties are managed through the Piping Tools menu. True False

2. The Align Components command enables you to place components in the model and later align the components based on the port selected on the component. True False

3. The AutoCAD Erase command is the best method for deleting components in a model.   True False

4. The Update Components command is used to edit database values of placed components. True False

5. The Spec Browser Utility allows you to drag components from the project spec library, directly to your model.   True False

6. Database records for a selected set of components can be viewed using the database tools. True False

7. A Bill of Materials on a drawing is the same as a Bill of Material generated as a report. True False

Dec‐09


Reporting Tools

Summary:

Answers: 1. True: The Piping > Piping Tools > Graphics Preferences command provides display options for AutoPLANT graphics

2. True: The Align Components command enables you to pick alignment ports from the components you want to align.

3. False: When you delete components from the model using the AutoCAD Erase command the component data in the database is not erased. Therefore it is important to use the Clean Database command to remove all data. A better method is to use the AutoPLANT Delect Components command to removes both the graphic and corresponding database files.

4. True: Piping includes powerful database tools for updating a component from the database. By changing values in the Update Component dialog, component changes are reflected in the model.

5. True: The Spec Browser Utility allows you to select components from your specification library and drag them into your model. This utility helps to lessen specification errors.

6. True: To view the database entries for a selection of components, you would use the Piping > Database Tools > View Database command.

7. False: The Bill of Materials placed on a drawing has been formatted to fit the drawing. Detailed information can be generated as a report that is not generally placed on the drawing.


ƒ

Set the display properties of model components

ƒ

Rotate a pipe segment about a connected port

ƒ

View database records for selected components

ƒ

Create a Bill of Materials in drawing and report type format

Reporting Tools


Dec‐09


Questions 1. Working within a project environment enables you to pre‐define settings for drawing units, custom borders and components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. Briefcase mode enables you to save component data in the drawing file.   ƒ ƒ

True False

3. Sample projects delivered with AutoPLANT are used for storing component data. ƒ ƒ

True False

4. You can easily change the drawing units at any time during your modeling session. ƒ

True

ƒ

False

5. Document Manager enables you to easily manage all drawing files related to a project ƒ ƒ

True False

6. You can set your Project Units at any time during the creation of a drawing.   ƒ ƒ

True False

7. The top level directory is known as a Project Root directory. ƒ ƒ Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

8. An example of a Project Object used in the Equipment application is the LineNumber.   ƒ ƒ

True False

9. Setting up a Work Area enables you to edit reference drawings from multiple disciplines. ƒ ƒ

True False

10. Location Points refers to the CAD coordinate system.   ƒ ƒ

True False

11. Nozzles are considered associative components ƒ ƒ

True False

12. Component Tag numbers cannot be duplicated.   ƒ ƒ

True False

13. The Project Preferences Control manages the relationships between drawing components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

14. The AutoPipe router command enables you to route pipe automatically between placed components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

15. Copied components are automatically given a unique tag. ƒ ƒ

True False

16. Cleaning the database on a regular basis ensures that all graphics on your screen contains a one‐to‐one relationship with the database.

ƒ ƒ

True False

17. Matching flanges for all elbows placed in the drawing are added automatically. ƒ ƒ Course Summary


Dec‐09

Review

18. Point Filters provide a method of defining offset distances from an existing reference component in a model.

ƒ ƒ

True False

19. s for pipe lines can be made from a section of pipe and an olet or elbolet. ƒ ƒ

True False

20. To create a stub‐in first requires the  to place an olet on the pipe section. ƒ ƒ

True False

21. Valve topworks can be added to your model at any time.   ƒ ƒ

True False

22. A Piping Module provides additional drawing routines and menus of specialty components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

23. Lines drawn in native AutoCAD can be used for placement of AutoPLANT components. ƒ ƒ

True False

24. The Centerline Router dialog gives you an easy method to route pipelines.   ƒ ƒ

True False

25. All AutoCAD polylines are intelligent.   ƒ ƒ

True False

26. The Connectivity Checker automatically checks connections between all components in your model.

ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

True False


Course Summary

Review

27. The Align Components command enables you to place components in the model and later align the components based on the port selected on the component.

ƒ ƒ

True False

28. The AutoCAD Erase command is the best method for deleting components in a model.   ƒ ƒ

True False

29. The Update Components command is used to edit database values of placed components.

ƒ ƒ

True False

30. A Bill of Materials on a drawing is the same as a Bill of Material generated as a report. ƒ ƒ

True False

31. If the external database is corrupted, you will need to start your modeling session from the beginning.

ƒ ƒ

True False

32. Creating a Nozzle Report gives you a good method of checking for missing components. ƒ ƒ

Course Summary

True False


Dec‐09

Review

Answers 1. Working within a project environment enables you to pre‐define settings for drawing units, custom borders and components.   True: Project mode enables you to define all drawing defaults and settings prior to starting the project.  All team  create models and deliverables to the same set of design rules.

2. Briefcase mode enables you to save component data in the drawing file.   True:  Briefcase mode is a associated with a  Configuration. It does not require a project, but stores all component data in the drawing.  Drawings in a Project can be saved in Briefcase mode and Briefcase drawings can be added to an existing Project.

3. Sample projects delivered with AutoPLANT are used for storing component data. True: Three sample projects are delivered with AutoPLANT. Although these projects can be used to store component data, is a good idea to always create a new new project based on one of the sample projects. New projects are easily created using the Project .

4. You can easily change the drawing units at any time during your modeling session. False:  If you are working within a Project environment, drawing units and all other project settings are defined by a Project  before any team member begins the modeling process.

5. Document Manager enables you to easily manage all drawing files related to a project. True: Document Manager is a utility application delivered with AutoPLANT. Using Document Manager to launch and manage drawing files guarantees that all related data is saved in the appropriate location with a project, ensuring access for all team .

6. You can set your Project Units at any time during the creation of a drawing.   False: Drawing Units must be set BEFORE you begin a drawing session. The Units ar used by all drawings that belong to the project.

7. The top level directory is known as a Project Root directory. True: The top level directory is known as the Project Root Directory. The directory level located below the root directory can contain any number of uniquely named projects.

8. An example of a Project Object used in the Equipment application is the LineNumber.   True: The only Project Object used when placing equipment components is the LineNumber. Once the Project  creates the list of Line Numbers to be used in the project, all components placed on a specific line number will form the correct relationship

Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

9. Setting up a Work Area enables you to edit reference drawings from multiple disciplines. False: A  can only place equipment components in a current drawing. Connections to the components in a reference drawing do not change the reference drawing in any way. Not edits can be made to reference drawings.

10. Location Points refers to the CAD coordinate system.   False: Location Points are reference points created by the  to position equipment components. Dynamic relationships in a Location Point make it easier for the  to move equipment, without worrying about connected components.

11. Nozzles are considered associative components. True: When you place a nozzle, it must be attached to an existing component to form an association.Component

12. Tag numbers cannot be duplicated.   False: All tag numbers within a drawing are unique. However, if you wish to use an existing tag number, a link to the original tag number is created upon placement.

13. The Project Preferences Control manages the relationships between drawing components. True: When components are placed on the drawing using the Project Preferences Control, these components form a relationship with other components in the same drawing or from other drawing in a project. Consistency is maintained across all drawings.

14. The AutoPipe router command enables you to route pipe automatically between placed components. True: Connecting pipe segments can be automatically routed using the AutoPipe command. This function enables you to place components throughout the model and when done, run connecting pipe between the components.

15. Copied components are automatically given a unique tag. True: When you copy components using the AutoCAD copy command, the system automatically appends the tag number. You can also set the Component Copy Preferences to prompt you to enter a unique tag number. If a duplicate tag is entered, you must decide if this is a unique component or a link to an existing component.

16. Cleaning the database on a regular basis ensures that all graphics on your screen contains a one‐to‐one relationship with the database.   True: Using the Clean Database command enables you to synchronize the components you see on the screen with the intelligent data stored in the project database. Graphics unintentionally created on the screen are removed. Status messages are displayed giving you all details.

Course Summary


Dec‐09

Review

17. Matching flanges for all elbows placed in the drawing are added automatically. False: If project specifications have been set up properly, the AutoFlange command can be used to automatically place matching flanges for your valves. The Auto Flange command must be set in the Drawing Preferences dialog prior to beginning the modeling session.

18. Point Filters provide a method of defining offset distances from an existing reference component in a model. True: AutoCAD point filters provide a method of establishing a reference point for placing a new component. It is useful when you are missing critical information on where to place a component.

19. s for pipe lines can be made from a section of pipe and an olet or elbolet. True: Simple pipe s can be attached to a section of pipe using either an olet or an elbolet. Elbolets are used when attaching to an elbo. Simple olets are attached to pipe sections when the angle is 90 degrees.

20. To create a stub‐in first requires the  to place an olet on the pipe section.   False: A stub‐in is a section of pipe that is welded directly to another pipe. These types of connections are typically made as branch connections where the added pipe diameter is the same or smaller than the main pipe section.

21. Valve topworks can be added to your model at any time. True: A valve can be placed into a model with or without the topworks or operators. All topworks can also be edited independently from the valve body.

22. A Piping Module provides special components along with additional drawing routines and menus. True: Specialty components, along with their own menus and drawing routines are provided as Component Modules. The High Purity module is an example that provides Triclover type fittings.

23. Lines drawn in native AutoCAD can be used for placement of AutoPLANT components. True:  AutoCAD lines or polylines can be used to place components. A straight tee placed at an intersection needs no further placement information.

24. The Centerline Router dialog gives you an easy method to route pipelines. True: When using the Centerline Router dialog interface, the direction, distance and slope between vertices is controlled. Attributes are easily defined from selections provided for you

25. All AutoCAD polylines are intelligent   False: When first created an AutoCAD polyline has no intelligence. You can covert a native AutoCAD polyline to an intelligent centerline by selecting the From Polyline command. Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

26. The Connectivity Checker automatically checks connections between all components in the model. False: When using the Connectivity Checker you must first specify which components you want to check. Any components outside of your selection set will not be tested.

27. The Align Components command enables you to place components in the model and later align the components based on the port selected on the component. True: The Align Components command enables you to pick alignment ports from the components you want to align.

28. The AutoCAD Erase command is the best method for deleting components in a model. False: When you delete components from the model using the AutoCAD Erase command the component data in the database is not erased. Therefore it is important to use the Clean Database command to remove all data. A better method is to use the AutoPLANT Delete Components command to removes both the graphic and corresponding database files.

29. The Update Components command is used to edit database values of placed components. True: Piping includes powerful database tools for updating a component from the database. By changing values in the Update Component dialog, component changes are reflected in the model.

30. A Bill of Materials on a drawing is the same as a Bill of Material generated as a report. False: The Bill of Materials placed on a drawing has been formatted to fit the drawing. Detailed information can be generated as a report that is not generally placed on the drawing.

31. If the external database is corrupted, you will need to start your modeling session from the beginning. False: A corrupted or lost database can be replaced from the data stored within the drawing. The Repair Database command will examine each component in the drawing and fills in the missing component values in the database.

32. Creating a Nozzle Report gives you a good method of checking for missing components. True:   By creating both an equipment report and a nozzle report you can easily   your components have been placed accurately.

Course Summary


Dec‐09

AutoPLANT Drawing Production Fundamentals V8i Bentley Institute Course Guide

TRN010290‐1/0002





V8i


Dec-09

Table of Contents

Course Overview ________________________________________________________ 1 Course Description ___________________________________________________________ 1 Target Audience _____________________________________________________________ 1 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 1 Course Objectives ____________________________________________________________ 1 Modules Included ____________________________________________________________ 2 System Requirements ________________________________________________________ 2 AutoCAD® or related Autodesk® Products _______________________________________________ 2 ProjectWise ed Versions ______________________________________________________ 3 Databases ed _______________________________________________________________ 3 Installing the Training Project __________________________________________________ 3 Introductory Knowledge ______________________________________________________ 5 Answers _________________________________________________________________________ 6

Drawing Setup _________________________________________________________ 7 Overview ___________________________________________________________________ 7 Prerequisites ________________________________________________________________ 7 Objectives __________________________________________________________________ 7 Creating a New Drawing ______________________________________________________ 8 Important Points ___________________________________________________________ 12 Deleting Documents _______________________________________________________________ 12 Save Command ___________________________________________________________________ 13 Save As Command ________________________________________________________________ 13 Reopening Your Model from Document Manager _______________________________________ 13 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 14 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 14 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 14 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 14

Production Drawings ___________________________________________________ 15 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 15 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 15 Dec‐09


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 15 Work Areas ________________________________________________________________ 16 Creating a  Work Area _____________________________________________________________ 16 Area100.rwa _____________________________________________________________________ 17 Work Area Views ___________________________________________________________ 18 Defining a Work Area View _________________________________________________________ 21 Applying Views to the Model ________________________________________________________ 30 Paper Space Setup __________________________________________________________ 33 Selecting a Page Size _______________________________________________________________ 34 Adding a Plotter __________________________________________________________________ 35 Adding a Border to the Drawing ______________________________________________________ 36 Adding Work Area Views to Paper Space ________________________________________ 38 Important Layout Notes ____________________________________________________________ 39 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 41 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 41 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 42 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 42

Dimensions & Annotations ______________________________________________ 43 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 43 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 43 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 43 Dimension Tools ____________________________________________________________ 44 Dimension Preferences ____________________________________________________________ 44 Setting Associative Dimensioning for View Ports ________________________________________ 48 Dimensioning Procedure ___________________________________________________________ 49 AutoPLANT Annotations _____________________________________________________ 52 Annotation Preferences ____________________________________________________________ 54 Placing Annotations _______________________________________________________________ 55 AutoPLANT Drafting Tools ____________________________________________________ 57 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 60 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 60 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 60 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 60

Bill of Materials _______________________________________________________ 61 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 61 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 61

Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 61

Table of Contents


Dec‐09

Table of Contents

Report Generator Utility _____________________________________________________ 62 Crystal Reports Engine _____________________________________________________________ 62 Bill of Materials Reports ______________________________________________________ 63 Configuring Report Output __________________________________________________________ 64 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 72 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 72 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 72 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 72

Import / Export Functions _______________________________________________ 73 Overview __________________________________________________________________ 73 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 73 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 73 Import / Export Utility _______________________________________________________ 74 PXF (Bentley Plant Exchange Format) _________________________________________________ 74 JSM (J Space Model Format) ________________________________________________________ 75 PCF (ISOGEN PCF Format) ___________________________________________________________ 75 Import / Export Preferences __________________________________________________ 75 Plant Exchange (PXF) ________________________________________________________ 76 JSM ____________________________________________________________________________ 77 Creating a New Model from PXF Export _________________________________________ 78 Setting Preferences _______________________________________________________________ 78 Creating the PXF File _______________________________________________________________ 81 Importing the PXF _________________________________________________________________ 82 Module Review _____________________________________________________________ 85 Questions _______________________________________________________________________ 85 Answers ________________________________________________________________________ 86 Summary __________________________________________________________________ 86

Automated Iso Generation ______________________________________________ 87 Description ________________________________________________________________ 87 Prerequisites _______________________________________________________________ 87 Objectives _________________________________________________________________ 87 AutoPLANT Modeling Concepts ________________________________________________ 88 Component Connections ___________________________________________________________ 89 Data Integrity – Component Connectivity________________________________________ 90 Consistency (Relationships) _________________________________________________________ 91 Specs ___________________________________________________________________________ 91 Examining the Data ________________________________________________________________ 92 Miscellaneous Attachments _________________________________________________________ 94 Isometric Sheet Numbers ___________________________________________________________ 99 Dec‐09


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Checking Component Connectivity ____________________________________________ 101 Creating Isometric Drawings _________________________________________________ 106 Import / Export __________________________________________________________________ 106 ISOGEN (PCF) ___________________________________________________________________ 107 Generating Automated Isos __________________________________________________ 110 Generating a Project Iso ___________________________________________________________ 118 Generating and Inspecting a PCF File _________________________________________________ 120 Configuring ISOGEN Settings _______________________________________________________ 123 Model Review _____________________________________________________________ 124 Questions ______________________________________________________________________ 124 Answers _______________________________________________________________________ 125 Summary _________________________________________________________________ 126


Table of Contents


Dec‐09

Course Overview Course Description During the AutoPLANT Equipment and Piping courses, a model was created simulating a collaborative work environment.  A “Work Area” was created to ensure that through collaboration, physical clashes between the disciplines did not occur. Now that our sample model is complete, it is time to learn how to produce the finished deliverables from the design data. Using the production functionality of AutoPLANT Piping, the student learns to create fully dimensioned and annotated orthographics and sections in the PaperSpace environment. Using the Import / Export utilities the student learns how to generate finished isometric drawings from the ISOGEN interface.

Target Audience ƒ

This course is designed for the new  with little or no exposure to a piping modeling application.

Prerequisites ƒ

The student must have a basic understanding of AutoCAD 2D and 3D functionality.

ƒ

Prior to taking this course it is highly recommended that the student review the AutoPLANT Piping tutorial delivered with the application.

Course Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Understand the benefits of using Document Manager

ƒ

Create a Work Area

ƒ

Setting up the Paper Space environment

ƒ

Add dimensions and annotation to a drawing

ƒ

Creating Bill of Materials, as a report or placed on a drawing

ƒ

Understand uses of the data exchange formats

ƒ

Creating automated isometric drawings using the ISOGEN interface 1 Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems Incorporated

Course Overview

Modules Included

Modules Included ƒ

Drawing Setup

ƒ

Production Drawings

ƒ

Dimensions & Annotations

ƒ

Bill of Materials

ƒ

Import / Export Functions

ƒ

Automated Iso Generation

System Requirements   The following prerequisites are required to run the modules included in the AutoPLANT Plant Design V8i (Version 08.11.05).   Processor:


Operating System:




Internet:


Memory:

2GB or greater

Hard Disk:


Input Device:


Output Device:





2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009


2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008


2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Building Systems:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

AutoCAD Mechanical:

2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008

Course Overview


Dec‐09


Note:




Databases ed

Microsoft Access 2000, 2002, 2003, 2007   SQLServer 2000, 2003, 2005 and MSDE and SQL Server Express   Oracle 9i Release 2, Oracle 10g Release 2, Oracle 11g Release 1d


ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ



Î Exercise 1: Install the Training Project dataset and add the project as a root directory. 1. Make sure all AutoPLANT applications are closed.   2. the dataset file AP_FV8i_DP.exe.   3. Save the file to your desktop.   4. Double click the file AP_FV8i_DP.exe.   5. Click Unzip to begin the extraction to the root directory of the C drive (C:\). 6. Click Close.   7. From your Windows Start menu, click Programs > Bentley > Plant V8i > Project Tools > Project .

Dec‐09


Course Overview

8. From the File menu click Add Root to display the Browse for Folder dialog. Note:



12. In the Browse For Folder directory, select C:\Projects Training Project. 13. Click OK to accept the name.    Notice the project root folder, C:\ Projects, now appears in the navigation tree at a primary level.


Note:


Course Overview


Dec‐09


Introductory Knowledge Before you begin, let’s define what you may already know.

1. Document Manager is a utility application used for managing the relationships between drawings belonging to a specific project.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. A Work Area file is set up to define areas within the modeling environment.   ƒ ƒ

True False

3. The AutoCAD Modeling environment and the Paper Space environment function in the same manner. What you add in Paper Space is automatically is added to a model.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. The AutoPLANT Report Generator utility uses Crystal Reports for processing  component data.

ƒ ƒ

True False

5. The AutoPLANT Selections tool enables you to select components based on a predefined query.

ƒ ƒ

True False

Dec‐09


Course Overview

Answers 1. True: Document Manager is delivered free with AutoPLANT applications. This utility provides an easy method of managing drawing files within a project environment. Files are stored to the correct location without additional input from the s.

2. True: Creating a Work Area enables you to attach reference drawings to a current drawing. Intelligence from components placed in a reference drawing can be picked up for placement of connecting components.

3. False: When you annotate or dimension a 2D drawing in Paper Space, these dimension marks do not show in the modeling environment. Paper Space is used for creating layouts of sections as specific views from the model.

4. True: AutoPLANT Report generator uses the Crystal Reports run‐time engine to generate reports.  AutoPLANT provides a wide variety of report templates.

5. True: Selecting components from you current drawing or from multiple drawings within a project is performed by the AutoPLANT Selections tools.

Course Overview


Dec‐09

Drawing Setup Overview The AutoPLANT 3D modeling applications enable the  to create complex piping systems. Once the model is complete, project deliverables such as orthographic layouts, including sections and cutaways are produced within the Paper Space environment.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should be familiar with the AutoPLANT Equipment and Piping applications.

ƒ

Students should have a basic understanding of the Work Area environment.

Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Launch the AutoPLANT Piping application using Document Manager.

ƒ

Create an orthographic drawing.


Drawing Setup

Creating a New Drawing

Creating a New Drawing In a previous course, a plant model containing equipment, piping and structural components was created using the functionality of AutoPLANT Equipment and AutoPLANT Piping.  These drawing files were managed by the Document Manager utility program included in the AutoPLANT Plant Design install.   You will use Document Manager to launch the application and create an orthographic drawing that will be added to the project.

Î Exercise 1: Use Document Manager to launch the application.   1. Open Document Manager from the Bentley Plant XM icon. 2. Select File > Open Project.

If this is the first time Document Manager has been used on your workstation, the Open Project dialog will list the default Project Root Bentley Plant XM Projects containing the sample projects as shown.   Once you begin working in a project, Document Manager will automatically open to your current project.

Drawing Setup


Dec‐09




Note:   This project has been created using Imperial Units.

5. Click OK. Document Manager now opens to the Training Project.

6. Take a moment to tour the Document Manager interface.

Dec‐09


Drawing Setup


Since this project was created for both AutoPLANT 2D and 3D fundamental courses, you will see P&ID drawings included.    Now let’s set up the first drawing.

Î Exercise 2: From Document Manager, create an orthographic drawing.   1. From the document list (shown in the previous figure) select AutoPLANT Piping 2. Right click and select new from the context menu.

3. In the New Document dialog enter: File name: Ortho1 Name: Ortho1 Description: Piping Orthographic Drawing

Note:

Drawing Setup

The path to the documents in the location field is managed by Document Manager.


Dec‐09


The Create, Record Only and Reserve buttons are disabled until you select the type of document you want to create.

4. Select AutoPLANT Piping.   5. Click Create to start AutoCAD and load the AutoPLANT menu and toolbar.   Note:

Because you have selected to create a new Piping drawing, Document Manager will automatically open AutoPLANT Piping.

6. The Model Setup dialog displays.

The Model Setup dialog indicates the project name and units you have selected and enables you to define the direction for North, the dimensions and origin for the model.    By default, North is set to 90° to match AutoCAD. The origin coordinates (x, y and z) indicate your plant model’s origin. 0,0,0 is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). When moved from the default location, it is then called the  Coordinate System (USC).

Note:

Dec‐09



Drawing Setup

Important Points


Imperial

Metric

Mixed Metric

North

90

90

90

World Length

100’

30000

30000

World Width

60’

18000

18000

Origin X, Y, Z

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

0.0, 0.0, 0.0

Insert North Arrow

OFF

OFF

OFF

Draw Limits Box

OFF

OFF

OFF

8. Click Done.    9. Click File/Save to save the new drawing.

Important Points When working in a project environment, it is important to establish methods of managing your files. You should get into the habit of using Document Manager’s functionality to manage your files.

Deleting Documents Once you create a document within a project, a new entry is made to the registry. To delete document files from a project, you should use the functionality of Document Manager.   When you select a document and right click, a Context menu provides you with the option to delete the drawing from the , as shown below.


Drawing Setup


Dec‐09

Important Points

Save Command ƒ


ƒ


ƒ


Save As Command ƒ



1. Select Programs\Bentley\Plant XM Select Bentley\Document Manager. 2. Select the desired drawing from the Document Window.   3. Select Edit from the Documents menu or the right click and select edit form the context menu.   Both AutoCAD and the AutoPLANT application that created the model will load.

Note:


Dec‐09


Drawing Setup

Module Review



True False

2. The Orthographic drawing is stored in the same location as the Piping model.   ƒ ƒ

True False


2. True: When you launch a project from Document Manager, you have the option of creating a new drawing that will be included in the appropriate location. The orthographic drawing is created by the Piping application and will reside in the same location as the model files.


ƒ

Launch the AutoPLANT Piping application.

ƒ

Create an orthographic drawing.

Drawing Setup


Dec‐09

Production Drawings   Overview    A Work Area creates a drawing environment enabling the  to reference drawings from other disciplines. Another function called Work Area Views enables you to create sections of your complete model, including the reference drawings, for the production of orthographic, cutaways and sections. Using the PaperSpace environment, fully dimensioned and annotated drawings are produced without cluttering up the modeling environment. In addition, when modeling components change, changes are automatically reflected in the PaperSpace drawings.

Prerequisites   ƒ

Students should understand the concept of a Work Area in the AutoPLANT Environment

ƒ

Students should have a working knowledge of the AutoCAD Model Space and Paper Space environments

Objectives   ƒ

Create Work Area Views

ƒ

Apply Work Area Views to the model

ƒ

Set up Paper Space and place a border

ƒ

Place Work Area Views as separate section views in Paper Space



Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

Let’s Review Before you begin creating any drawings, let’s take a moment to review how the modeling environment was structured.  During the equipment and piping modeling courses, all project drawings were and stored in predefined locations and component data was meticulously managed using AutoPLANT tools.  All drawings became a member of a Work Area.

What’s a Work Area Work areas define a geographical area within a plant environment.  Plants limits are usually comprised of areas which are subdivided into units depending on the size and constructability of the area.    When modeling within a collaborative work environment, it is imperative that all disciplines work together to ensure a cohesive design environment.  Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Piping, Electrical, Instrumentation and other discipline design files make up the complete design of the plant model. For this reason, disciplines looking to complete their design must reference models from other disciplines to ensure that physical clashes between designs do not occur.  Bentley has provided an enhanced solution to assist in the ease of design through “Work Areas”. “Work areas” can be stored as text files (rwa files) or can be stored in the project database.   The RWA file or database table stores the reference files that are contained within a geographical area of a plant boundary as well as the insertion origin and rotation angle of the design file.    In the graphic below, the plant is defined by the outer boundary.  Within the plant limits, five geographical areas have been defined as Area 100 through Area 500.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

Area100.rwa   During the AutoPLANT Equipment course a Work Area was created.  Both the Equipment and Piping models were added as  of the Work Area.  In addition, other discipline files, including structural steel and foundations were added as reference files.

This .rwa file is comprised of xref drawings from all disciplines.  Reference drawings are linked to the current drawing using AutoCAD’s Xref/Overlay command.   Work Areas can be created by discipline, geography, or even process units.  How a project will be broken up into specific Work Areas is the decision of those involved in the design process.

Note:

Exercises for defining a Work Area from Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Setup are covered in the AutoPLANT Equipment XM Fundamentals course

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

Work Area Views After a Work Area has been defined, specific areas of the model can be isolated in a Work Area View. These views are used for the production of orthographic layouts and sections printed from the Paper Space environment. Notice in the figure below, the area defined around the horizontal vessel.

A Work Area file called Area100.rwa has been included in the dataset.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

Î Exercise 1: Open the Work Area included in the dataset.   1. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Setup.   Note:

The Work Area Views dialog can be opened from either the Equipment or Piping application.

2. Select Open and navigate to the Supplemental directory installed with the dataset.   3. Select Area100.rwa.

4. Click Open.   5. The Work Area setup dialog lists all drawings and their path location, including all reference drawings.

6. Click Done.   7. ZOOM extents to view the predefined Work Area. This model includes equipment components, piping runs and structural components.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

The Work Area Views functions will be used to sections off areas within this model.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

Work Area Views Î Exercise 2. Define a Work Area View.   1. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views. 2. The dialog identifies the Project Description and the Work Area name previously defined during the AutoPLANT Equipment and Piping Fundamentals XM Edition courses.

3. Click Add to create a view. The View Properties dialog appears enabling you to define a 3D box that will enclose a section of your model determined by the attributes you set.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

View Title: The name you set for the view will appear in the Views list in the Work Area Views dialog.   The image shows the Front view with the selected face highlighted with a bold red line. Scale is used when the view is placed in Paper Space. The unit format is based on your drawing’s unit settings. View Options set your Paper Space options.  You can set to have a dashed match line drawn around the view port; add or remove the coordinates of the “cut” region; enforce the front and back clipping planes; and, turn on or off a solid line around all AutoCAD viewports. 3D View Envelope: These values define your view.  If you know the coordinates of opposite corners of your bounding box, you can enter them in the East and North fields for the First Point and Second Point.  Elevation boundaries are entered in the Upper and Lower elevation fields. You can also use the Pick < buttons to select your two points or use the Pick View Area By Window < button to select an area.

Note:

Production Drawings

When picking points, you MUST be working in PLAN VIEW.


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

4. For Section 1 view, enter the following attributes, as shown in the dialog above: View: Front Scale: 3/8”=1’ View Options: Check Front Clip, Back Clip, Viewport Visible First Point: East: 1055’ , North: 1018’ Second Point: East 1075”, North 1033’ Elevation: Upper 118’, Lower 100’

5. Once defined click OK.   The new view is added to the list and the functions for using the views become active.

6. Click Section 1, and click Preview.   You will see an outline box surrounding the area you defined.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

7. Click Close to end the command.   Note:

To exit Preview Mode, click Enter. Using Esc can lock your drawing or make your Work Area file‐ read only. To correct this, open Windows Explorer and search for the appropriate Work Area file (.rwa extension). Right‐ click the file and press Properties. Change the file to read‐write by unchecking Read‐Only.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

Î Exercise 2: Create Section 2 and Section 3 views with the attributes from the table.    Note:

For all views you create in this exercise, make sure Front Clip, Back Clip, and Viewport Visible are all checked.

1. Open Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views. 2. Click Add.   3. Enter the parameters as shown. Note:

You must click OK in the View Properties dialog after defining the view. Click Add to create the next view.

Imperial

First Point

Second Point

Elevation

View Title

View

Scale

East

North

East

North

Upper

Lower

Section 1

Front

3/8” = 1’

1055’

1018’

1075’

1033’

118’

100’

Section 2

Left

3/8” – 1’0”

1051’

1034’‐6”

1067’

1051’

142’

100’

Section 3

Right

3/8” = 1’0”

1004’

1015’‐3”

1026’

1035’ 3”

115’

100’

Metric

First Point

Second Point

Elevation

View Title

View

Scale

East

North

East

North

Upper

Lower

Section 1

Front

1:30

317000

305500

323000

310000

35500

30000

Section 2

Left

1:30

315000

310300

320500

315500

42500

30000

Section 3

Right

1:30

301500

304500

308000

310500

35000

30000

Mixed Metric

First Point

Second Point

Elevation

View Title

View

Scale

East

North

East

North

Upper

Lower

Section 1

Front

1:30

317000

305500

323000

310000

35500

30000

Section 2

Left

1:30

315000

310300

320500

315500

42500

30000

Section 3

Right

1:30

301500

304500

308000

310500

35000

30000

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

In the next exercise you will use the Pick function to define the area.

Note:

You must be in Plan (Top) view to use the Pick functions.

Î Exercise 3: Create Section 4 using the Pick Area by Window function. 1. Switch to Plan view as shown in the figure.

2. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views. 3. Enter following attributes in the fields: View Title:  Section 4   Scale 3/8” = 1’ 0” (1:30 for metric or mixed‐metric)   Upper Elevation = 114’ (34200 for metric or mixed‐metric)   Lower Elevation = 100’ (30000 for metric or mixed‐metric).

4. Click Pick View Area By Window button. 5. Draw a box around the vertical vessel VH‐45 as shown above. 6. Click OK when done.   7. Click Save. You can switch to an isometric view to see the results.

8. Once you change to an isometric view, you will need to initiate the command by selecting Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views to repick a view from the list.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

9. Save the drawing.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

Î Exercise 4: Create an Upper and Lower plan view using the Pick< buttons and the additional data in the table. Make sure you are in a Plan (TOP) view.

1. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views. 2. Use the Pick buttons for the First and Second points and the attributes from the table.   3. When done use Preview to see your results. Imperial

Elevation

View Title

View

View Scale

Upper

Lower

Upper Plan

Top

3/8” = 1’ 0”

130’

112’

Lower Plan

Top

3/8” = 1’ 0”

112’

100’

Metric

Elevation

View Title

View

View Scale

Upper

Lower

Upper Plan

Top

1:30

39000

33600

Lower Plan

Top

1:30

33600

30000

Mixed Metric

Elevation

View Title

View

View Scale

Upper

Lower

Upper Plan

Top

1:30

39000

33600

Lower Plan

Top

1:30

33600

30000

4. When done click Save. Your views should resemble those shown.

Note:

Production Drawings

The images shown on the next page were captured after using the HIDE function.


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

Applying Views to the Model Now that you know how to define a view, we will apply the view to the model to isolate the area to enable you to create a section in PaperSpace.

Î Exercise 5: Apply  a named view to the model   1. Select view Section 1 from the dialog and click Apply in Model.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Let’s Review

2. The figure below shows Section 1 isolated from all surrounding model components.   These views will be used later for creating a cutaway in Paperspace.

Using 3D Views If you apply a view and switch to an isometric view you may experience odd screen representation as shown below.  To turn the clip option off follow these steps.

1. At the command line enter dview. Select objects or <use DVIEWBLOCK>:

2. Type all. Select objects or <use DVIEWBLOCK>:

3. Click Enter.   [CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoo m/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/Undo]:

4. Type CL, click Enter.   Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] : off

5. Enter off, click Enter. Your model will be restored.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Let’s Review

Î Exercise 5: Select a view and apply to the model.   Your views should resemble the samples shown below.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Paper Space Setup

Paper Space Setup Drawings of a three dimensional model are typically printed or plotted using AutoCAD's Paper Space functionality.

Layouts of a model are created by combining pre‐defined sections and views on a “virtual” paper drawing including full dimensioning and text annotation.  When text is added in Paper Space, the model stays clean. When you switch back to Model Space, text and leader lines are all hidden from view. The exercises in this module will teach you how to use Paper Space with the AutoPLANT Work Area View function.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Paper Space Setup

Selecting a Page Size Setting up your system to print from Paper Space involves selecting a plotter and a page size from the Layout1 tab in AutoCAD.

Î Exercise 1: From the Layout1 tab, set the printer parameters and paper size for your drawing.

1. Click on Layout1 tab at the bottom of your AutoCAD screen. Note:

Delete any existing viewports.

2. Go to File > Page Setup Manager and click Modify to open the Page Setup – Layout1 dialog.

3. From the Printer/plotter Name drop down list, select PublishToWeb DWF.pc3.  (If you do not have this option, see the Adding a Plotter section below.)

4. From the Paper size drop down list, select ANSI E (44.00 x 34.00 Inches) [ISO A0 (1198 x 841) for metric or mixed‐metric].

5. Click OK.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Paper Space Setup

Adding a Plotter If PublishToWeb DWF6ePlot.pc3 is not an available printer/plotter, you can add it using the Plotter Manager. During this course you will be printing your Paper Space drawings to a file rather that a printer or plotter.

Î Exercise 2: Add PublishToWeb DWF.pc3 to your list. 1. Select File > Plotter Manager. 2. Double click Add‐A‐Plotter Wizard to activate the wizard. 3. Click Next> in the Add Plotter – Introduction Page, Add Plotter – Begin, Add Plotter – Plotter Model, and Add Plotter – Import P or Pc2 dialogs to get to the dialog shown below.

Note:

You can skip these steps because the driver used in this course is used for plotting to a file.

4. In the Add Plotter – Ports dialog, select Plot to File and click Next>.

5. In the Add Plotter – Plotter Name window, enter Add PublishToWeb DWF in the Plotter Name field and click Next>.

6. In the Add Plotter – Finish window, click Finish. You can now select Add PublishToWeb DWF.pc3 and set your page size as described in the exercise above.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Paper Space Setup

Adding a Border to the Drawing Î Exercise 3: Add an E‐sized (A0 for metric or mixed‐metric) border to your Paper Space. 1. While in Paper Space, go to Piping > Drawing Production > Drawing Setup.    2. At the prompt: Align/Create/Scale viewports/Workarea views/Options/Title block/Undo:

3. Enter T to enter the title block commands.   4. Click Enter.   Delete objects/Origin/Undo/ :

5. Click Enter. 6. Select your border from the Available title blocks dialog.

7. Click OK to place the title block on the drawing. 8. In the Edit Attributes dialog enter a document name.   Note:

This name will appear on the drawing.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Paper Space Setup

9. Enter a document file name.   Align/Create/Scale viewports/Workarea views/Options/Title block/Undo:

10. Click OK.   11. Click Enter to exit the command. 12. Click Save. Note:

Borders can be moved with the AutoCAD Move command if it is not inserted properly.

Your drawing should resemble the one shown below.

Dec‐09


Production Drawings

Adding Work Area Views to Paper Space

Adding Work Area Views to Paper Space When you add views, annotations and other elements in Paper Space, the items are not visible in Model Space.    When you place a Work Area View in Paper Space, and then make changes to your model all changes to the view are automatically updated within the Paper Space environment.

Î Exercise 1: Add a Work Area View to your Paper Space layout.   1. Select Piping > Drawing Production > Work Area Views to open the Work Area Views dialog.

2. Select the desired view. 3. Click Insert in Drawing to close the Work Area Views dialog. 4. At the AutoCAD prompt: Insert point of viewport:

You can enter the coordinates of the center of the view port (0,0,0 is the lower left corner of the page) or drag the viewport to the desired location on the page.

Note:

If you are using AutoCAD’s Dynamic Input feature, your on‐screen prompt may read   Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>:

5. The Work Area Views dialog will re‐open to place another view.   6. Place the remaining views in your layout to resemble the figure shown on the following page.

7. To end the command click Close. 8. Click Save.   Note:

Production Drawings

You can use AutoCAD Text function or Multitext to create the labeling as shown in the figure. AutoPLANT does not offer a specific function to self‐title the viewports.


Dec‐09


Important Layout Notes   ƒ

In the layout tab, you can view and edit objects, including viewports and title blocks. The crosshairs cursor is active over the entire layout area.

ƒ

Once placed, you can move, resize or rescale viewports. Edits to viewports in Paper Space will not alter the definition of the original Work Area View.

Note: ƒ

It is strongly suggested that you lock the display of viewports placed in Paper Space. Locking prevents you from accidentally losing the contents by panning or zooming within the viewport.

ƒ

By default, a new drawing starts with two layout tabs, named Layout1 and Layout2.

Note:

Dec‐09

See AutoCAD HELP for scaling viewports in Paper Space.

If you use a drawing template or open an existing drawing, the layout tabs in your drawing may be named differently.


Production Drawings


To create a new layout tab with your current settings: When you are creating layouts, you may wish to copy the settings, borders and any additional items you wish to appear on the new layout. A simple method is to make a copy of the layout tab and its settings from the current drawing file.    Follow these steps:

1. Right‐click the layout tab of the layout you want to duplicate.   2. From the context menu, click Move or Copy.   3. In the Move or Copy dialog box, select a position for the new layout tab.   Make sure that Create a Copy is selected.

4. Click OK.   Note:

Note The Model tab cannot be duplicated.

This is a quick method for creating addition layouts on a project.  To learn how to create a template for layouts, go to AutoCAD Help. This exercise completes this module.

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Module Review




True False

2. A Work Area View is stored with a Work Area file.   ƒ ƒ

True False

3. When creating Work Area Views, using the “Pick View by Window” function gives you a fast method of selecting an area in your model.

ƒ ƒ

True False

4. Adding text added to a Paper Space layout is added automatically to the model.   ƒ ƒ

True False

5. Borders and Title Blocks can be added easily to a Paper Space layout. ƒ

True

ƒ

False

6. A layout and all properties can be copied.

Dec‐09

ƒ

True

ƒ

False


Production Drawings

Summary

Answers 1. False:  Work Areas enable you to access the intelligence within drawings added to a Work Area.  Only your current drawing can be edited. All referenced drawings are READ ONLY.

2. True:  Once you create a Work Area you can create views of the model. These views are saved to the Work Area file. Work Area Views are used for isolating specific areas of the model to create layouts in Paper Space.

3. True: If you know the elevation of the area you wish to capture, you can use pick function to create a window surrounding the area. You must be in a Plan mode to use this function.

4. False: Any text you add to a Paper Space drawing does not change the model. The modeling environment stays clean.

5. True: When you set up your Paper Space environment, AutoPLANT enables you to add default borders. You can also create a custom border specific to your company.

6. True: Although layouts can be easily copied, it is a recommended idea to create a template for common components.


ƒ

Create Work Area Views

ƒ

Apply Work Area Views to the model

ƒ

Set up Paper Space and place a border

ƒ

Place Work Area Views as separate section views in Paper Space

Production Drawings


Dec‐09

Dimensions & Annotations Overview Production of fully dimensioned and annotated drawings is a primary task of the CAD   during all phases of the design and construction process.  AutoPLANT provides an extensive annotation library of preferences and drafting tools for fast and accurate drawing production.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should have a basic working knowledge of the AutoCAD dimensioning and Annotation commands.

Objectives ƒ

Set AutoCAD dimension preferences

ƒ

Set Associative Dimensioning for View Ports

ƒ

Place linear and continuous dimensions in Paper Space

ƒ

Place AutoPLANT drawing annotations in Paper Space

ƒ

Plant insulation marks on a pipe segment in Paper Space

ƒ

Create a break in a pipe line in Paper Space

Dec‐09



Dimension Tools

Dimension Tools AutoPLANT Piping uses AutoCAD’s dimensioning tools.  However, AutoPLANT does modify the DIMLFAC environment variable so that dimensions represent true model distances.    Dimensions and annotations are NOT connected to your viewports, therefore changes to a viewport do not affect the annotations.

Dimension Preferences AutoCAD provides ‐settings for every part of a dimension.  For this course, the default settings for Arrow Size, Text Height, and Unit Format are not appropriate and need to be changed.  The AutoCAD DDIM command will open the Dimension Style Manager dialog.

The Modify button will open the Override Current Style ‐ Standard dialog where you will make changes in the Symbols and Arrows, Text, and Primary Units tabs.

Note:

Before changing your dimensioning preferences, make sure you are in Paper Space.



Dec‐09

Dimension Tools

Î Exercise 1: Modify the arrow size, text height and unit format.

1. In Paper Space, enter DDIM at the AutoCAD Command Prompt.

2. Select STANDARD and click Modify to open the Modify Dimension  Style: Standard dialog.

3. Click the Symbols and Arrows tab.

4. Change the Arrow Size to 1/8” (5 for metric and mixed‐metric).

Dec‐09



Dimension Tools

5. Click the Text tab.

6. Change the Text Height to 1/8” (5 for metric and mixed‐metric).  This will also set the text height for your annotations.

7. Change text placement to Above. 8. In Text alignment section click Aligned with dimension line. 9. Click Primary Units tab.



Dec‐09

Dimension Tools

10. Change the Units format to Architectural. (Decimal for metric and mixed‐metic). 11. Change the precision to 0.00 (0 for metric and mixed‐metric). 12. Click OK. 13. Click Close on the Dimension Style Manager dialog.

Dec‐09



Dimension Tools

Setting Associative Dimensioning for View Ports Associative dimensioning or DIMASSOC variable can be used to read view port scales and change the dimension scale to reflect model dimensions rather than Paper Space scale.   With associative dimensioning set to on, it is not required to change the Scale Factor in a dimension style to reflect view port scales.  The variable can be set in the AutoCAD options dialog under the  Preferences tab.

Î Exercise 1: Set the Associative Dimensioning in your ortho1.dwg file. 1. Select Tools > Options.

2. Select  Preferences tab. 3. Check on Make new dimension associative. 4. Click Apply.   5. Click OK.



Dec‐09

Dimension Tools

Dimensioning Procedure The AutoCAD Dimension toolbar matches AutoCAD’s Dimension menu. You may find working with the toolbar faster.

Note:

Dimensioning is easier when the AutoCAD Snap function is turned off.  Click F9 or the SNAP button at the bottom of the screen.

It is assumed that you already know how to place a dimension.

Dec‐09



Dimension Tools

Linear Dimension Placement Steps 1. Select Dimension > Linear Dimension command.    2. You will be prompted with: Specify first extension line origin or <select object>:

3. Pick on the dimension origin. Using Osnaps such as NODE, END, or CEN will improve accuracy. Specify second extension line origin:

4. Pick on the dimension end point. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]:

5. Click on the location for the dimension line. 6. To continue the dimension, activate the Dimension > Continue Dimension command.   You will be prompted with Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>:

7. Click on next dimension point. 8. Once each dimension point has been selected, Press Enter to exit the command. 9. To continue any dimension, activate the Dimension > Continue Dimension command.   You will be prompted with: Select continued dimension: Select the dimension to continue Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>:

Click on the next dimension point.



Dec‐09

Dimension Tools

Î Exercise 2: Dimension your Paper Space drawing as shown in the figure.    This sample has been created in imperial units.

1. Place dimensions at the locations shown.   2. Continue to place dimensions in other locations of your choice.   3. Click Save.

Dec‐09



AutoPLANT Annotations

AutoPLANT Annotations   AutoPLANT Piping provides a wide variety of drawing annotations combined into groupings. Each group has its own flyout toolbar.   AutoPLANT Equipment also provides a set of annotation tools located under the Equipment menu.

Access the Piping annotation toolbar from Piping > Toolbars > Function Toolbars> Annotation.



Dec‐09


Annotation Toolbar Quick Reference   Annotation Group

Annotation

Database Fields

Main Size

Main Size of the component.

Short Desc

Short Description of component.

Long Desc

Long Description of component.

Spec Pipe Cut Length Insulation Thickness Line Number

Description

Specification of component. Cut length value of component. Insulation thickness of component.

Line No. Short

Number-Specification-Main Size

Line No. Long

Number-Specification-Main Size - Commodity (if specified) - Insulation (if specified)

Line No. Short w/CL

Centerline symbol is followed by the Line No. Short annotation

Line No. Long w/CL

Centerline symbol is followed by the Line No. Long annotation

Notes

General Notes

Place your own notes in the drawing.

Elevations

TOP Elevation

Top of Pipe elevation of component.

COP Elevation

Center of Pipe elevation of component.

BOP Elevation

Bottom of Pipe elevation of component.

NE Coordinate

North, East coordinate location of the selected point

NS Coordinate

If the point is below (0,0), then South coordinates. If the point is above (0,0) then North coordinates. Annotation is placed as horizontal text only.

EW Coordinate

If the point is to the right of (0,0), then East coordinate. If the point is to the left of (0,0), then West coordinate. EW Coordinate annotation is placed as vertical text only.

Coordinates

Tags

Coordinate

(x,y,z) coordinate location of the selected point.

Material Tag

Component’s MAT_MARK database field value. If that field is empty, you will be prompted for a value with the Enter Material Mark dialog.

Component Tag Instrument Balloons

Component's TAGNUMBER database field value. If that field is empty, you will be prompted for a value with the Enter Component Tag dialog. Instrument balloons are further categorized as Standard, Rear, Lights, and Miscellaneous.

Dec‐09




Annotation Preferences Making changes to the Annotation Library is typically the responsibility of the Project .  However, you can make style changes to your annotations from the Annotation Preferences dialog.  Select Piping > Annotation > Preferences to access the dialog. When Annotation Style is set to DefaultSettings, you can make changes to every annotation style. By selecting a specific Annotation Style, you can overwrite the default settings for just that style.

The Annotation style changes you can make from the Annotation Preferences dialog include:

Placement Mode The Normal setting only prompts for location information. The Text setting allows you to edit the annotation text before final placement. You can also explode an annotation after placement to edit the text.

Text   These settings define text size and placement.



Dec‐09


Block   These settings relate to how AutoCAD block are defined and annotated.

Container   These setting determine borders surrounding the annotation.

Leader These settings refer to style characteristics.

Placing Annotations With small variations, annotation placement is quite simple:

1. From the toolbar, select an annotation type 2. Select the component to annotate OR the anchor point for the annotation Note:

When selecting a component, the leader will connect to the point used to select the component.

3. Select by dragging to the location for the annotation If your Annotation Preferences Placement Mode is set to Text, you will be prompted with: Format/Edit vertex/Rotate/Move/Annotation/eXit <X>:

From this line, you can format the text, relocate or rotate the annotation, or exit.

4. Select the next component to annotate 5. When you are finished, Click Enter or Esc to end the command.

Dec‐09




Î Exercise 1: Follow the basic steps above, place annotations on pipelines L1001 and L1002 as shown in the following figure.

1. Include these annotations:   ƒ ƒ ƒ

Long line number Main size of pipe Bottom of pipe elevations

2. When complete, Save your drawing.



Dec‐09

AutoPLANT Drafting Tools

AutoPLANT Drafting Tools AutoPLANT provides a collection of drafting symbols enabling you to further detail your drawings.   Menu Item Symbol Manager Title Block Hide Viewport

2D Symbols

Description Provides some basic drag and drop symbols using standard block insertion function. Also provides an environment used to create new symbols Opens Available title blocks dialog. Preferences

Open HLR Options dialog to change Hidden Line drawing properties

Hide

Create a 2D representation of a selected viewport using the settings in the HLR Options dialog.

Horizontal Vessel Vertical Vessel Misc. Equipment Symbols

• • • •

Hosereels Ladders Doors Stairs

Arrows

• •

Flow North

Revision Symbols

• •

Small Large

Section Markers

• • •

Section Markers Section Headings Elevation Mark

• • • •

Yes No Question Stop

Piping Symbols Spec Breaks Misc. Markers

Insulate Pipe Pipe End Symbol 2D Editing

Broken Pipe

Add specified insulation to selected length of pipe. This WILL insulate the pipe segment if it is not insulated already. Place a pipe end symbol to the closest end of the selected pipe. Trim

On 2D AutoPLANT component, works like AutoCAD’s TRIM command.

Ungroup

Ungroups all elements of selected 2D component.

Regroup

With only one element selected, regroups AutoPLANT 2D component that was previously ungrouped.

Add to group

Adds to a 2D component by first selecting the component and then the elements to add.

Delete from

Deletes selected entity from ALL instances AutoPLANT 2D component from drawing.

Remove from

Deletes selected entity from current AutoPLANT 2D component.

Break

Breaks selected 3D pipe segment with Straight, Curved, or Invisible symbols. defines size of gap.

End Break

Create a break at selected pipe segment end. Cannot be mended.

Mend

Repairs selected broken pipe segment.

Mend All

Repairs all pipe segments broken with Break command.

To place these symbols follow the prompts.

Dec‐09




A full description of the Drafting Tools can be found in the online help.  Go to AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Drafting Tools Menu > Drafting Tools Menu.

Î Exercise 1:  In Model Space, add insulation to L1002. 1. Change to a Top view and Zoom into the pipe segment connected to T‐136. 2. Select Piping > Drafting Tools > Insulate Pipe. 3. Pick the segment of L1002 you wish to insulate. 4. In the Insulation Data dialog, enter 1” (25mm) as the thickness and AA as the spec for the insulation.

Note:

You will not be prompted with the Insulation Data dialog again until you add insulation to a different line number.

5. From Port 1, pick a point where the insulation starts or enter a value greater than 0. 6. With reference to Port 2, pick a point where the insulation ends or enter a value greater than 0.

7. Click Save.    Your drawing should resemble the figure.



Dec‐09


Î Exercise 2:  In Paper Space, break a section of pipe. 1. Select Piping > Drafting Tools > Broken Pipe > Break. 2. In Paper Space, in the viewport from Section 1, select the L1001/L1002 by line, to the left of the valve.

3. Indicate where the break starts with respect to Port 1 of the pipe segment.  Your selection should be close to, but not overlapping the vertical segment of L1002 where the by crosses in front of the line.

4. Indicate where the break ends with respect to Port 2 of the pipe segment.  This point should be close to the other side of the segment described in the previous step.

5. Click Save.   The completed break should resemble the figure below.

You have now completed this module.

Dec‐09



Module Review


Questions 1. Insulation symbols are added in the modeling environment to indicate a section of a pipe that will receive insulation during construction.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. A common annotation on a piping layout is the Long line number.   ƒ ƒ

True False

Answers 1. False: Insulation symbols are placed in Paper Space and are not included in the modeling environment.

2. True: The Long line number is a common annotation that includes the Line number, spec and size rating for the pipe.


ƒ

Set AutoCAD dimension preferences

ƒ

Set Associative Dimensioning for View Ports

ƒ

Place linear and continuous dimensions in Paper Space

ƒ

Place AutoPLANT drawing annotations in Paper Space

ƒ

Plant insulation marks on a pipe segment in Paper Space

ƒ

Create a break in a pipe line in Paper Space



Dec‐09

Bill of Materials Overview The Reporting functions in AutoPLANT enable you to define and create detailed reports of equipment and piping components. These reports can be output to a printer, stored as a file or included in the drawings as Bill of Material lists or a BOM.

Prerequisites ƒ

Students should have a basic knowledge of the AutoPLANT Selections dialog used for selecting components.

ƒ

Students should have a basic knowledge of the Paper Space environment.

Objectives

Dec‐09

ƒ

Understand how reports are configured and generated

ƒ

Place a Bill of Material report on the Paper Space layout


Bill of Materials

Report Generator Utility

Report Generator Utility The AutoPLANT Report Generator utility is used by all AutoPLANT Plant Design applications to generate a report that can be output to a printer, a file, or displayed in preview mode. Crystal Report (*.RPT) files formats are configured for your use with a specific report name and/or type.

Crystal Reports Engine The Report Generator functions use Seagate Software's® Crystal Reports™ run‐time engine to process the component data for the report.

Note:

You must first purchase the Crystal Reports software to generate new or modify existing report files.

When you request a report:

1. The Report Generator extracts the component drawing database records, as selected from the drawing database and saves to a temporary database.

2. The temporary database is cleaned to remove any records for components that no longer exist in the drawing.  In AutoPLANT Piping, the pipe cut lengths are recalculated.

3. The Report Writer (from Crystal Reports) extracts the data from the temporary database and processes it for the selected report file.

Bill of Materials


Dec‐09

Bill of Materials Reports

Bill of Materials Reports The Bill of Materials function is a common utility shared by several AutoPLANT applications.   The Piping > Reports > Bill of Materials option displays the dialog shown below. This dialog enables you to set the parameters that will be used to format a BOM for placement on the current drawing.

The content of a BOM type report is similar to a BOM report.  However, column order and spacing have been formatted to suit placement on a drawing.

Note:

Dec‐09

Material Tags are used for Isometric drawings and will not be covered in this course.


Bill of Materials


Misc Options The Options section of the AutoPLANT Report Generator dialog provides filtering, formatting and ordering options for your report.

ƒ

Omit Sort Codes:  AutoPLANT specifications include a Sort Code field as another means of organizing data.  In the installed AutoPLANT specifications, components such as welds and bolts have Sort Code values of 100 or greater; therefore, by omitting sort codes greater than 99, you can keep those component types out of your reports.

ƒ

Ignore Existing Components:  The component database field EXISTING indicates if a component is existing or not in brown‐field projects.  Turning on this switch will filter all components labeled as existing from your report.

ƒ

Clean Database Fasteners:  This switch will clean the model database of extraneous fasteners, keeping them from being included in your report.

ƒ

Append Pipe End Preparations:  This will add pipe end preparation data to the end of the pipe description.

ƒ

Append Topworks Description:  This switch will add the topworks description to the end of the valve’s description.  This can be useful if topworks are being filtered out of the report by their Sort Code.

ƒ

Ascending SORT_CODE Order:  By default, components are listed by Sort Code in descending order.  This is how pipe, with a Sort Code of 17, is listed before weldneck flanges, that have a Sort Code of 1.  This switch will reverse the sort to ascending order.

Configuring Report Output Clicking the Configure button takes you to the Report Definitions dialog.   Here you create and edit Report Names by asg a Report File to the report name.    The report is defined as a Bill of Materials by checking on the Use for reports on CAD Drawing box.

A list of Report File types can be called from the browse button.

Bill of Materials


Dec‐09


These files are located in the %NETWORK_ROOT%\Reports directory.

Dec‐09


Bill of Materials


This table summarizes the content of each report file. Report File Name

Provided Report Name

Description

Bomcad.rpt

CAD STANDARD

Accumulates components by size then type

Bomcutln.rpt

CAD CUT LENGTHS

Cut lengths by size then type, remaining components accumulated

Bommaint.rpt

CAD MAINTENANCE

Cut lengths and other components listed individually

bomround.rpt

CAD ROUNDED

Cut lengths rounded to next foot/meter, remaining components accumulated

bomfcut.rpt

CAD CUT  LENGTHS SHOP/FIELD

Shop Components: Individual cut lengths sorted by size, remaining components accumulated Field Components: Individual cut lengths sorted by size, remaining components accumulated

bomcutlnonly.rpt

CAD CUT LENGTHS ONLY

Individual cut lengths sorted by size then type

bomspcutlnonly.rpt

CAD SPOOL CUT LENGTHS ONLY

Individual spool cut lengths sorted by size then type

bomspool.rpt

CAD SPOOL

Grouped by spool: Accumulated cut lengths sorted by size then type, remaining components accumulated

bomtotal.rpt

CAD TOTAL

Accumulated pipe lengths and components subtotaled by size and type

bomweight.rpt

CAD WEIGHT

Cut lengths sorted by size then type, remaining components accumulated

sftotal.rpt

CAD SHOP/FIELD TOTAL

Shop Components:  Individual cut lengths subtotaled by size, remaining components accumulated Field Components: Individual cut lengths subtotaled by size, remaining components accumulated

Note:

All configuration changes are saved to the local machine and are project specific. An   can copy the same configuration to multiple projects if needed.

Bill of Materials


Dec‐09


From the Bill of Materials dialog, select Options. The Bill of Materials Configuration dialog opens.

General Tab   Select the report format, change placement and border properties.

ƒ

After selecting a Format, you can change any of the settings for the current report.   You can save a new configuration by clicking on the New button and providing a name for the current settings.  Your selected format is shown in the dialog’s title bar.

ƒ

BOM Placement options include: a named node, a defined origin, or by picking a point at the time of placement.  The Placement Corner defines what corner of the report is located at the placement point.

ƒ

Some default Border Properties are part of a saved format.  You can change the AutoCAD layer, line type, line weight and LT Scale

ƒ

You can also set the Text Offset distance from vertical borders and column lines.

Title Tab Enter the title of the report and set its text properties.

Header Tab Set the text properties of the report’s column headers.

Row Tab Set the text properties of the report’s rows.

Dec‐09


Bill of Materials


Column Tab Set your columns and column properties.

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Column line attributes are set in the Default Column Line section. Attributes of each column is set in the Properties section.  Changes are only made to the value selected in the Name field. The Header is text that will appear at the top of the column Text properties include:  Justification, LTScale, Line Weight, Width and Line Type. Column content and order are managed in the Organize Columns dialog, opened by clicking on the Organize button.

ƒ

Attributes that can be included in your Bill of Materials are all listed in the Organize Columns dialog.  Attributes currently included in the report are listed in the Current column, additional attributes can be added by selecting it in the Choose From column and clicking on the Add> button.  Similarly, attributes can be removed from the report by selecting it and clicking on the

ƒ

The order of attributes in the Current column reflects the order of the report columns.  Column order is changed by selecting an attribute and clicking on either the Up or Down Arrow buttons.

For additional information on the Bill of Materials go to Online help.

Follow this General Procedure: 1. The contents of the BOM is controlled by the Report selected.   2. Select the desired Report, and then set the other option parameters as desired.   3. If you want to customize the format (font, line type, column, etc.) click Options.  A tabbed dialog will display to enable you to customize the format of the BOM.

4. When you have finished defining the BOM options, clickOK.   5. The AutoPLANT Selections dialog will display to enable you to define the selection set of components included in your BOM.

6. When you have finished defining the selection set, the BOM will be placed on the drawing using the method that you defined in the General tab of the Bill of Materials Configuration dialog.   Bill of Materials


Dec‐09


Î Exercise 1: In Paper Space, add the “cut lengths only” report to your drawing. 1. Select Piping > Reports > Bill of Material.   2. Select CAD CUT LENGTHS ONLY report type.   3. Pick Options…

4. From the Column tab of the dialog, pick Organize.

Dec‐09


Bill of Materials


5. Select the fields from the Choose From window and move to the Current window. Organize the fields using the Up and Down arrows.

6. Pick OK.   7. Pick OK to close the Bill of Materials Configuration dialog.   8. Set the Bill of Materials dialog as shown.

9. Click OK.   10. From the AutoPLANT Selection dialog select the Project tab.

Bill of Materials


Dec‐09


11. The query is based on LineNumber. Check L1001, L1002, L1004, L1007, L1008.

12. Click Ok.   The Report Writer opens and generates the report based on you criteria. This may take a few minutes. When the generation is complete, you will be prompted to specify where you want to place the BOM.

13. Pick the area in your Paper Space layout between the title block and the Section 2 viewport. A section of the report is shown below.

This exercise completes this module.   Dec‐09


Bill of Materials

Module Review


Questions 1. When creating a report, the Report Generator utility gathers the component data and stores it in a temporary database.

ƒ ƒ

True False

2. A report format cannot be changed.   ƒ ƒ

True False

Answers 1. True: The Report Generator first stores the data in a temporary database where the data can be first cleaned of any records that no longer have corresponding components in the model.

2. False: The format of a report is a saved configuration which can be changed to suit your requirements. All options including header titles, placement, border properties, text offsets, to name a few, can be configured by the .


ƒ

Understand how reports are configured and generated

ƒ

Place a Bill of Material report on the Paper Space layout

Bill of Materials


Dec‐09

Import / Export Functions Overview The Import / Export utility included in the application enables the  to transfer CAD data from AutoPLANT to other CAD and CAE applications. Fully dimensioned and annotated isometric drawings are easily generated through the export of model data to the ISOGEN interface.  Exported piping can be exchanged between the plant design application and the AutoPIPE stress analysis application. In addition, standard output formats address the issue of updating legacy data from PROPIPE and DESIGNER applications to the current version of AutoPLANT 3D Plant Design applications.

Prerequisites   ƒ

Students should have basic knowledge of the AutoPLANT 3D design environment

ƒ

Student should have a basic understanding of data exchange methodology

Objectives   ƒ

Gain an understanding of PXF, JSM and PCF exchange formats

ƒ

Create a 3D model from exported model data

Dec‐09



Import / Export Utility

Import / Export Utility The Import/Export utility transfers CAD data between AutoPLANT and other CAD/CAE software.  Go to AutoPLANT 3D > Import/Export to add the menu to the AutoPLANT interface.

Pre‐defined data formats, usually in an ASCII file, can be generated or read by AutoPLANT.   AutoPLANT currently s two formats for output (PXF and PCF) and one format for input (PXF).   The export functions read the drawing and database information in the model and writes the necessary data in the format that is required by the target program. The input function reads the data from the host program and generates a drawing and database, which can then be manipulated within AutoPLANT applications.   A brief description of these formats is provided below.

PXF (Bentley Plant Exchange Format)   ƒ

PXF provides a smooth transition from Bentley's PRO‐PIPE and DESIGNER legacy drawings to the AutoPLANT PIPING format.

ƒ

Enables you to export AutoPLANT PIPING data to the AutoPIPE stress analysis application.

ƒ

Can generate a Plant Exchange file from AutoPLANT ISOMETRICS drawings, then use the PXF Import option to generate an AutoPLANT PIPING model from the exchange file data.



Dec‐09

Import / Export Preferences

JSM (J Space Model Format)   Import/Export exports components in JSM format. The J Space Model is the format required by Bentley ProjectWise Navigator for viewing models.  For more information on JSM go to Online Help.

PCF (ISOGEN PCF Format)   PCF is the format required by ISOGEN™ to automatically generate isometric drawings from AutoPLANT PIPING models. In association with Alias Limited©, Bentley has developed an interface to their ISOGEN™ software. This application simplifies the process required to take the PCF (Piping Component File) file created by AutoPLANT Import/Export to an ISOGEN AutoCAD‐compatible DXF isometric file.    This function is discussed in length in the next module.

Import / Export Preferences The Import/Export Preferences dialog allows you to set how an import or export behaves including the location of exported files.   Options under the General tab apply to all types of exports including to PCF, PXF and JSM.

ƒ

Dec‐09

Debug component scripts: Advanced functionality and should be turned off for day‐to‐ day use.



Plant Exchange (PXF)

ƒ

Load component scripts in memory: Keeps component information in memory and accelerates subsequent exports.

ƒ

Overwrite existing files: Overwrites the last export of this name/type with the current one.

ƒ

Enable component log: Creates an external ASCII text file of the import/export log.

ƒ

Show progress dialog: Opens a dialog that mirrors the actions of an import or export.

ƒ

Log file: Set the location of the log file that records all information, warnings, and errors that occur during an import or export process.


Output Dir and Input Dir: specify the location of files exported or imported. Document Transversal Mode, Stop Signs, and Use Connection criteria work the same for both PXF files and PCF files.



Dec‐09


JSM

Output Dir: These options specify the location of exported files. Document Transversal Mode, Stop Signs, and Use Connection criteria work the same for both PXF files and PCF files. JSM options are not discussed further in this course.

Dec‐09



Creating a New Model from PXF Export

Creating a New Model from PXF Export   Although Plant Exchange Format (PXF) is primarily used to move piping data between the AutoPLANT and AutoPIPE applications, it does have an added benefit. When PXF Export is run it will not include any components that have become corrupted.    The function allows you to export a specific pipe run from an existing model as a PXF file and create a new piping model.  It there were errors in the pipe run, these components will not be exported.   This exercise teaches you how to create a new model from an existing model.

Note:

If you have created the Piping model without errors, all piping components will be exported.

Setting Preferences First, you will set the preferences to define how the export will be created and where to store the export file.

Î Exercise 1:  In the Piping model, load the Import/Export application and set the preferences.

1. From Document Manager, open the Piping model and launch the Piping application. 2. Select AutoPLANT  3D > Import/Export.  The menu loads.   3. Open Import/Export > Preferences. 4. In the General tab, set: ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Debug component scripts is OFF Load component scripts in memory is ON Overwrite existing files is OFF Enable component log is OFF Show progress dialog is ON Log file location is the default



Dec‐09


5. In the ISOGEN (PCF) tab, set: ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

The Document Traversal Mode to Combined Stop Signs to Create multiple files Uses Connection Criteria to ON System Iso to OFF Automatically run ISOGEN to ON Calculate Center of Gravity to OFF Ignore Errors to OFF Iso Stype to Final Continuing Components to 1

6. In the Plant Exchange (PXF) tab, set: ƒ Dec‐09

Output and Input directory locations to C:\Bentley Training Projects\Training.




Note: ƒ ƒ ƒ

You will need to create the PXF folder.

Document Traversal Mode to Combined Stop Signs to Create multiple files Use Connection Criteria to OFF

7. Click OK.    The file is stored in the output location you defined.



Dec‐09


Creating the PXF File Î Exercise 2:  Using the PXF file format, export line L1002. 1. Select Import/Export > Plant Exchange (PXF) > Export. 2. In the AutoPLANT Selections dialog, write a query for pipeline L1002.

Hint:

If you check the Get attributes for selected docs only box, and browse for the line number, any lines not included in your piping model will be excluded from the pick list.

3. Click OK on the AutoPLANT Selections dialog to initiate the export. The Export Progress dialog will open and show the status of the export.  When the process is complete, the dialog should look similar to the figure shown.

Dec‐09




4. Click OK. 5. Click File > Save.

Importing the PXF Now, let’s import the PXF into a new model.

Î Exercise 3:  Using Document Manager, create a new Piping model and import the PXF file.

1. Start Document Manager and open your training project. Note:

Using Document Manager to create new models is the best method to ensure all project drawings are stored in their proper locations.

2. Select the AutoPLANT Piping node, right click and select New.

3. Name the new model  Export_Training,   4. Select AutoPlant Piping as your document type, and click Create. 5. When the Model Setup dialog opens, keep the default settings by clicking Done. 6. Once AutoCAD is loaded, if necessary launch the Piping application. 7. Select AutoPLANT 3D > Import/Export to load the menu. 8. Select Import/Export > Plant Exchange (PXF) > Import. 9. In the Select Files dialog, navigate to C:\Bentley Training Project\Training and select the PIPING.PXF file.



Dec‐09


10. Click Open. The Import Progress dialog opens. When the import is complete, the dialog will appear similar to the figure shown.

11. Click OK.    12. Use Zoom Extents to view your imported pipeline.   13. Click Save.   14. Your model should resemble the dialog shown.

Dec‐09




   You can see how valuable this type of function is when required perform modifications.



Dec‐09

Module Review


Questions 1. The PXF format only allows one way exporting of model files.   ƒ ƒ

True False

2. When exporting piping runs using the PXF Export function, all files, are exported, even if there are errors in the model.

ƒ ƒ

True False

Dec‐09



Summary

Answers 1. False:  The PXF function is used for both exporting and importing files. The function reads the database information and necessary data in the format required by the target program.

2. False:  PXF export will not export piping components that contain errors.

Summary ƒ

Gain an understanding of PXF, JSM and PCF exchange formats

ƒ

Create a 3D model from exported model data



Dec‐09

Automated Iso Generation Description AutoPLANT provides a function to automate the generation of isometrics drawings from the model.  Bentley uses ISOGEN technology that is embedded in AutoPLANT application.  Prior to creating isometric drawings from your piping model you must first ensure the component data is consistent and correct.  Once you are confident of the data, you can create the iso by exporting the data to the ISOGEN application embedded in the application.

Prerequisites ƒ

Hands on experience with AutoPLANT modeling applications.

ƒ

Basic understanding of isometric drawing formats

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:

ƒ

Understand how model data is gathered for iso generation

ƒ

AutoPLANT model data for component connectivity and consistency

ƒ

Add miscellaneous attachments and annotation to a model

ƒ

Add stop signs to create page breaks on an iso

ƒ

Create automated isos using the ISOGEN interface.

Dec‐09



AutoPLANT Modeling Concepts

AutoPLANT Modeling Concepts As intelligent components are placed in an AutoPLANT model, all connectivity data, such as how and where components are connected to one another or which fasteners are used to make a t, is stored in the database.    This connectivity information is crucial for the successful output of automated isometric drawings from the ISOGEN interface. Without proper connectivity, ISOGEN will not generate an isometric drawing as expected or at all.



Dec‐09

AutoPLANT Modeling Concepts

Component Connections When we talk about components and connections in AutoPLANT, we use  such as Ports, ts, and Fasteners.  The following definition of  and exercises will help you understand how to check for connectivity between components in the model and assure that your modeling data is consistent.   Once you are confident that your data is correct, AutoPLANT uses the data to create a .PCF file (Piping Component File). The PCF then es the information to the ISOGEN interface to automatically create the isometric drawings.

Note:

ISOGEN does not access AutoPLANT data directly.

First, let’s review some important  and later we will examine the data in the existing model.

Ports A port is a position on a component that can be connected to another component.  Ports contain data driven by the spec including size, rating, facing, as well as data specific to the component placement such as direction and location.

ts and Fasteners A t is a connection between two ports and a fastener is another component that is required to connect the two ports. For example, a flange has two ports – the flanged side and the welded side. When connecting two flanges face to face, you have a t. There are also two fasteners that are automatically inserted for a flanged connection – bolts and gaskets.   A fastener is present in the database just as any other component such as a fitting, valve or pipe. The main difference is that a fastener is placed automatically when a t is made.

Attachments An Attachment is an AutoPLANT component that is placed directly on an existing component. There are no port connections but rather the attachment uses the coordinate system of the parent (the component it is attached to) for the location and direction. Examples include top‐works on valves or s on pipe and fittings.

Pipe Centerline ISOGEN assumes all points for a pipeline fall along an imaginary centerline. For this reason all attachments must have an origin that is along the centerline of the routed pipe and fittings.  When the origin of any component falls outside the centerline this will cause ISOGEN to fail and in most cases no drawing is created.

Dec‐09



Data Integrity – Component Connectivity

Spool Numbering A pipe spool is a connected set of piping components that have been prefabricated in a shop and delivered to a field installation site as a single entity. ISOGEN can annotate and report the spool numbers on an iso. These spool numbers can be set in the model and indicated in the PCF file or ISOGEN can assign the spool numbers automatically.    For more information on customizing your isogen files, refer to the ISOGEN course.

Weld Numbering ISOGEN can annotate and report the Weld numbers on an Iso. These numbers can be set in the model and indicated in the PCF file or ISOGEN can assign numbers automatically.

Data Integrity – Component Connectivity During the process of creating a PCF file, data from each component along a pipeline is gathered, evaluated and put into a “connected order”.  AutoPLANT traces along the components from port to port until it gets to either the end of the pipeling or a gap or disconnect.

Notice that pipe port 1 is connected to flange port 2 by the t using the fastener (weld).   The arrows represent the direction of the ports. In addition to the data match required for a t (rating, size, etc.) the ports direction must align in order for the t to be made. This alignment can have a tolerance set for each t type in the project.   If the weld or t is missing or if the components have changed since they were placed, then the connection is considered broken. This commonly happens when AutoCAD editing commands are used incorrectly during the modeling process (copy, move, stretch, mirror, etc.).  It is essential that the designer responsible for creating the 3D model confirms the components are connected as part of the piping design process.    AutoPLANT tools used to analyze and repair the connectivity of piping components in the 3D model are explained in the following exercises.   Automated Iso Generation


Dec‐09


Consistency (Relationships) Since AutoPLANT uses component data to create the isometric, it is important to ensure the data is consistent.    For example:  A line number is used to group the components into a connected system called a pipeline.  Even one component with the wrong line number can make a mess of the isometric. Similarly, attributes such as Unit, Area, or Service are commonly used to group components and to name the isometric so these too must be consistent.

Specs ISOGEN outputs the pipe spec of the first component it finds in the pipeline as the nominal spec for the iso.  Since every component in the line also has a spec, whenever there is a change in spec between fittings a spec break is drawn on the iso. Care must be taken during the modeling phase to ensure the correct pipe spec is used throughout a line.

Dec‐09




Examining the Data Now that you have completed the modeling process, let’s take some time to examine the data from connecting ports, ts and fasteners.  Let’s use L1008 at the top of T‐136.

Ports, ts, Fasteners Î Exercise 1:  Inspecting the port data 1. Using Document Manager open the Piping model and ZOOM to L1008 at the top of T‐ 136.

1. Place a 3” flange at the end of L1008 using the fitting to fitting method.   2. Edit the flange using the Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component menu option.   3. Select the component. 4. When the Flanged Component dialog appears click Next Page to review the port and database information. At the top of the screen you will notices it tells you the Port is not connected.

5. Place a mating flange and edit the original flange again. Notice that the flange now reports it is connected.

6. Leave the drawing open as you will use this model in the next exercises.



Dec‐09


Tap Ports As you have learned, AutoPLANT Components have ports as part of their definition. The flange in the previous example had two ports as we would expect.  Some components need the ability to add additional ports so that components such as weldolets and saddles can be attached. In this way AutoPLANT treats a pipe (normally only two ports) as a tee by adding the additional tap port.

Î Exercise 1: Inspect the tap port on L1004 1. On L1004, a tap port was used to connect a drain line.  We can use this connection to illustrate how an additional port was added to the existing pipe segment.   ZOOM into P‐104 where the  has been added to L1004.

2. Select Piping > Database Tools > Edit Component. Select L1004.   3. From the Piping Information dialog select Next Page to review the port and database information.

4. Scroll down to display the third port that has been added to the component.  A valve was added to the 2” line.

5. Click Cancel to end the command.

Dec‐09




s Pipe s must be connected to a piping component in order for them to appear on the isometric drawing.  They do not connect using ports but are consider “attachments”.  There is however a data relationship between the attachments and the primary component.  Note that each attachment must have at least one point that falls along the centerline of the pipeline and in most cases will be placed directly on pipe.

Miscellaneous Attachments   AutoPLANT features several attachments that may be placed by the  along a pipeline for the purpose of adding annotation to the isometric generated by ISOGEN. Miscellaneous attachments are placed similar to s.   The Piping > Misc. Attachments menu includes detailing components such as flow arrows, comments, wall openings.

    When placed in the model the components are exported during the automated isometrics generation process.

Placement Procedure 1. Select a component from the dialog. 2. Select a component from the model to form the association. 3. Select a base port for placement – the active port is indicated with a green dot and you can toggle from port to port.

4. Provide a distance from the base port.



Dec‐09


5. Enter the text to be associated with the component that will appear in the Isogen drawing.

Flow Arrows One exception to this procedure is the flow arrow.  Rather than entering text, you would provide the direction of flow. Most Miscellaneous Attachments are represented by an orange sphere placed within the pipe component.  The shapes used for insulation and flow arrow components are not spheres. The figure illustrates the flow arrow placed within on a pipe segment.



See the table below for examples of how miscellaneous attachments will affect the isometric.   Attachment

Description

Flow Arrow

Places a Flow arrow symbol on the Iso in the direction as indicated in the 3D Model.

Insulation Symbol

Example:

Places a short symbol on the Iso indicating insulation is on the pipe and   entered text as shown.

Location Point

Places a dimension to a point anywhere in the 3D Model.

Comment

Dec‐09

Places text and a leader pointing to a selected location along the pipe, optionally with a container (as shown) or a dimension.




Floor Opening

Places a Floor symbol at any location along the pipe, optionally with a container or a dimension.

Grate Opening

Places a grating symbol at any location along the pipe, optionally with a container or a dimension.

Wall Opening

Places a wall symbol at any location along the pipe, optionally with a container or a dimension.

Additional Material

Adds a material list item to the bill of materials.

Reference Dimension

Places as 1,2 or 3D dimension to any point such as a building column or other landmark.

Spool Identifier

Places a spool identifier at any location along with pipeline. Note that this manual method is Not recommended! Spools are discussed later in this course.

Test Port Instrument Bubble

Places a bubble reading “Test Port” at a   selected location on the pipeline.

Isogen End of Line Instrument Bubble

Places an instrument bubble with text as entered by the , Note: This is for untagged items as there is No link to project tags for this type of annotation.

In the next exercise, you will add detail to a piping model in preparation for creating an automated isometric drawing.

Note:

For more information go to AutoPLANT PIPING Help > Command Reference > Component Menus > Base Module > Misc. Attachments.



Dec‐09


Î Exercise 1:  Add a flow arrow, comment and insulation mark to line L1002. 1. From Document Manager, open the Export_Training.dwg as shown.    Note:

We will add the Miscellaneous Attachments to this drawing, instead of cluttering up our model.

Note:

Document Manager assures all project files are stored in the appropriate location.

Refer to the illustration below to place the Miscellaneous Attachments.

2. Select Piping > Misc. Attachments.  Select Flow Arrow.

3. Follow the command line to place the Flow Arrow, mid‐span of the pipe segment as shown.  Once placed the symbol location can be easily modified using the move command.

Dec‐09




Now place a comment on the segment of L1002 before the by.

4. Select Piping > Misc. Attachments.   Select Comment.  The dialog gives you the option of adding specific text for the comment.

5. Make the Annotation Container Square.    Note:

The generated iso displays the information and leader line pointing to the selected location.

6. Click OK to place the symbol and end the command.  Your attachment appears as shown.



Dec‐09


Isometric Sheet Numbers In many cases a connected set of components that make up a particular line number (or pipeline as ISOGEN refers to it) cannot fit on a single sheet.  In this case ISOGEN will create multiple sheets while consecutively numbering the sheets.   While this is a very useful and powerful feature you must be careful as subsequent runs of the same pipeline may produce some undesirable results, such as:

ƒ

Same number of sheets produced but the sheet numbers are flipped around.   (e.g… 1 is 6, 6 is 1, and a variety of changes made to the 2‐5 sheets.

ƒ

A different number of sheets are produced.

ƒ

The break point where the iso continues to the next sheet may be different (different component or port).

A common technique used to control where the sheets break or what to number them , can be added to the 3D model  by inserting Stop Signs at a component port within a piping segment. This is an easy method to create a sheet break prior to creating your Isometric drawings.

Adding a Stop Sign AutoPLANT Piping enables you to insert Isometric Stop Signs at a component port, within a piping segment. These stop signs create the page breaks for Isometric drawings.

Î Exercise 1:  Add a Stop Sign to L1002 on the vertical end of the elbow as shown.

Stop Sign

Dec‐09




1. Using Document Manager, select and right‐click to edit the Piping model to launch the application and your current drawing.

2. Zoom into L1002. It may help to turn off the steel layers as shown in the figure.   3. Select Piping > Piping Tools > Isometric Stop Signs. 4. Select the 90 degree elbow.   5. At the prompt, type T to toggle to the port where the Stop Sign is to be located. 6. Click Enter to place the Stop Sign. 7. Save the model.



Dec‐09

Checking Component Connectivity

Checking Component Connectivity   The Piping Tools > Connectivity Checker menu provides options that enable you to confirm proper connectivity along piping runs. Even though the AutoPLANT Piping application checks for connectivity during normal routing activities, it is a good practice to inspect the connectivity prior to creating an iso.   Reasons for improper connections are most commonly a result of moving or copying components, then improperly placing them at new locations.

Checker    This command enables you to check a selected group of components for proper connectivity. When the command is executed, the Drawing Selection Options dialog displays to enable you to define the selection set of components that you want to test (e.g., you may only want to check consistency for a specific line number).

Once the component selection set has been defined, the first disconnect (if one is found) and the Connectivity Check dialog display as shown. Dec‐09




Refer to the table for a description of the options: + ‐

Click + to zoom into the currently displayed disconnect, or click ‐ to zoom out from the currently displayed disconnect.

< >

Click > to move to the next disconnect, or click < to move to the previous disconnect.

Repair

Click Repair and you will be prompted to select the desired connecting component to attempt a repair. If the disconnect distance is within the allowable range, the connection will be repaired; otherwise, a dialog will display the reasons the connection cannot be repaired.

More...

Displays an expanded version of this dialog as shown below that provides a Suspend option and a more detailed explanation of each disconnect.



Dec‐09


A description of the options include:

First, Prev, Next, and Last

Click these buttons to scroll through disconnects. Information about disconnect at the selected port is displayed in the bottom pane of the dialog, while the display zooms into that area of the drawing for closer examination.

Zoom In/Out

Click these buttons to zoom into or away from the currently displayed disconnect.

Repair

Click this button to attempt to repair the connection between two coincident welded components. For example, if you copy a pipeline connected to one butt‐ weld component to the end of another butt‐weld component, you can use this command to properly connect the second butt‐weld component with the copied pipeline. Flanges and other components that are not coincident cannot be connected with this function.

Suspend

Click this button to temporarily suspend the Checker command. This process can be continued at any time using the Resume Checker command.

Brief

Displays the Brief version of this dialog as shown previously.

Resume Checker This command prompts you to select a set of components on a run, and then specify the starting component. The command then highlights each component in the run progressing down the line until an improper connection is detected. The command then exits to allow you to correct the problem at that location.

Check Run The third command allows you to resume a connectivity check on a group of components that may have been previously suspended.

Dec‐09




Î Exercise: Check and repair the Connectivity in the example model.   In this exercise you will run the connectivity checker on L1002.

1. If the piping model is not already open, use Document Manager to open the Piping model, by selecting Edit from the context menu.

2. Select Piping > Piping Tools > Connectivity Checker > Checker. 3. Build a selection set from the AutoPLANT Selections dialog.

4. You can either run the checker on all piping in the model by selecting All or create a query to of specific pipe runs.



Dec‐09


5. Once the query is run, use the functionality of the checker to zoom into the area that contains any errors to fix the connection.

Dec‐09



Creating Isometric Drawings

Creating Isometric Drawings Now that you have ensured your model data is accurate it is time to generate the isometric drawings.  Through a series of exercises you will learn how AutoPLANT model data is gathered to produce a Piping Component File (PCF).  This PCF is the format required by ISOGEN™ to automatically generate the isometric drawings. Once the PCF is created, it is run through ISOGEN to create an AutoCAD‐compatible DXF isometric file that can be viewed and plotted.

  Import / Export   As you learned earlier, the Import/Export utility transfers CAD data between AutoPLANT and other CAD/CAE software.   Now you will learn how this utility s the generation of isometric drawings from

Î Exercise 1:  Exploring the Import / Export Options.   1. Go to AutoPLANT 3D > Import/Export to add the menu to the AutoPLANT interface.   2. From the Import/Export menu select Preferences… The Import/Export Preferences dialog allows you to set how an import or export behaves including the location of exported files.

Note:

Options under the General tab apply to all types of exports including to PCF, PXF and JSM.

ƒ

Debug component scripts: Advanced functionality and should be turned off for day‐ to‐day use.

ƒ

Load component scripts in memory: Keeps component information in memory and accelerates subsequent exports.



Dec‐09


ƒ

Overwrite existing files: Overwrites the last export of this name/type with the current one.

ƒ ƒ

Enable component log: Creates an external ASCII text file of the import/export log.

ƒ

Show progress dialog: Opens a dialog that mirrors the actions of an import or export. Log file: Set the location of the log file that records all information, warnings, and errors that occur during an import or export process.

3. Click Cancel to end this exercise.

ISOGEN (PCF) In a previous module you may have explored the Import / Export Utility used for transferring model data to other applications.  Now let’s explore the options for creating the iso from your model.

Î Exercise 2:  Explore the ISOGEN (PCF) options 1. Select AutoPLANT > Import/Export to load the menu.   2. Select Import/Export > Preferences.   3. From the dialog select the ISOGEN (PCF) tab as shown.

Refer to the table for a description of Import/Export Preferences dialog fields.

Dec‐09




Output Dir

Specifies the directory path where ISOGEN PCF files are stored when executing Generate Iso from the Import/Export menu. This path is set in by the . It is displayed here so the  can find and inspect the PCF files. In many cases s never need to know where PCF files are generated as they are typically processed by ISOGEN and then removed.

Document Traversal Mode

Specifies whether the selection set of components built from multiple drawings is processed as a single selection set or treated as separate selection sets. If you are only processing one drawing, the result will be the same regardless of this selection.   Combined: combines all components from all drawings into a single selection set. If none of the other processing options are selected (Use Connection Criteria, Read/Break Stop Signs), a single export file is generated. This selection set may still be broken into separate output files based on the additional criteria selection available (e.g., stop signs, connection criteria dialog settings, etc.)

Per Document: handles the components from each drawing as a separate selection set. If none of the other processing options are selected (Use Connection Criteria, Read/Break Stop Signs), a separate export file is generated for each drawing in this set. Each of these output files may be further broken into separate output files based on the additional criteria selection available (e.g., stop signs, connection criteria dialog settings, etc.). Stop Signs

Enable you to manage how stop signs placed on your drawings are used by the PCF functions. Do not use: Ignores all stop signs Write to file: instructs the system to read Stop Signs in your selection set and write Stop Sign information to the generated PCF file. This information is then processed by ISOGEN to add notes, etc. This option does not break your output into separate PCF files.

Create multiple files: instructs the system to use stop signs in your selection set to break the PCF output into separate PCF files. Use Connection Criteria

System Iso

Automatically run ISOGEN

Calculate Center of Gravity (COG) Iso Style


Specifies that the Connection Criteria dialog displays after the selection dialog enabling you to specify one or more database fields to apply to the connectivity test. For two connected components, the value of the criteria field(s) must match for a connection to be established. If a disconnect in connection criteria is found using the defined criteria, then a break in the Iso into separate drawings occurs.

Provide a means of putting multiple lines on a single Iso. If this check box is enabled, all components matching the criteria are put into a single PCF. The Iso will display annotation indicating the change in line number. If this check box is enabled, when you execute PCF Export the system will automatically send an error free PCF file through ISOGEN. If ISOGEN is successful in generating a DXF file from the PCF export file, the system will automatically send the DXF through DXF2DWG to create an AutoCAD‐ compatible DWG file, and the PCF file will be deleted. Enable this check box to include center of gravity (COG) calculation data in the PCF export file.

Sets the ISOGEN output style from a list of Styles defined in the current project.


Dec‐09


Continuing Components

Specifies the number of additional components that do not belong to the criteria, but which connect to the criteria, to output into the PCF file.   Example: If you select a line with a TEE and the line number changed at the branch of the TEE, you could include "X" number of components that connect to the branch of the TEE in the PCF. In ISOGEN, continuing components are dashed and do not appear in the BOM.

4. Notice the options available from the Iso Style drop down.

The Isogen Styles supplied with the AutoPLANT software for each unit type include:   Check:  Used for creating isometric drawings to check pipe lines Erection:  Used for creating isometric drawings for erecting the pipe lines Final:  Used for creating isometric drawings for shop/field fabrication of the pipe lines I‐Gen:  If you do not have a valid AutoPLANT Piping license, only I‐Gen style will be available in the list.  This style uses the LINENUMBER as the only criteria.   Spools:  Used for creating separate isometric spool drawings for shop fabrication Stress:  Used for creating isometric drawings for stress analysis

Note:

In this course you will be using the FINAL Iso Style.

5. Make sure Iso Style is set.    For the purpose of this course the Iso Style will be set to FINAL as you will be creating fabrication isos from the Piping model.

6. Set Iso Style to FINAL and click OK to end this exercise.

Dec‐09



Generating Automated Isos

Generating Automated Isos   The Import / Export function enables you to automatically run the process for creating a iso from your model.  This is a fast and easy method.  By selecting the Output Options to automatically run an Iso, you are telling the system to gather the data for the drawing, create a PCF, export the data to ISOGEN and create the AutoCAD –compatible DWG file, which can be viewed and printed.  The PCF file is deleted and you are left with finished Isos.   This course teaches you how to automatically create an iso from the model.  Later you will learn the benefits of creating and saving a PCF file.

Note:

Advanced training in ISOGEN teaches you how to customize the appearance of a iso, by modifying the settings in the PCF.

Î Exercise 1:  Creating automated isos from the model.   1. With the Piping model open, select AutoPLANT > Import/Export to load the menu.   2. Select Import/Export > Preferences.   3. From the dialog select the ISOGEN (PCF) tab as shown.

4. Check Automatically run ISOGEN.   5. Select FINAL for the Iso Style.   6. Click OK.   7. Select Import/Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > Generate Iso. Automated Iso Generation


Dec‐09


    The ISOGEN functions shown above are only available during a 3D modeling session.   The active model MUST be associated with the project containing the pipelines to be output to ISOGEN.  It is not necessary to load any particular 3D model.  Even a blank model will work.

8. From the drawing tab only components from your current model can be selected.   There are three selection modes:   All ‐ selects every component in the model eligible for the process. Manual  ‐ closes the dialog to enable you to select specific components from the model. Advanced – allows you to write a query based on model data, AutoCAD attribute or project object.

9. In this exercise you will select All.  Click OK.   Once the set of components has been selected, the Preferences dialog appears, enabling you to define:

ƒ ƒ

Dec‐09

How and where a piping line will be broken into separate drawings A naming convention applied to the generated drawings.




10. For this exercise, select AREA, UNIT and LINENUMBER from the Available Fields, and click Add >>  to move them to Criteria Fields .   The file name of each drawing is defined in the Naming Rule field.    By default, the name will be a concatenation of each of the selected criteria, in the order they were selected.    Any text you want to include in the file name, including spaces or hyphens must be contained within quotation marks.  Notice the addition of ISO and the hyphens in the figure above.

Note:

If multiple files are created with the same criteria, (common when Stop Signs have been added to the model) the names would be identified as (NAME).i01.dwg, (NAME).i01.dwg, etc.

11. Under the ISOGEN (PCF) tab you have the option of changing the preferences that had been defined in the ISOGEN (PCF) tab of the Import/Export’s Preferences dialog.



Dec‐09


12. Check that all your preferences are set and click OK to istart the process.   13. You will receive progress messages during the process.



14. When complete click OK.   15. To view the iso drawings, return to the Isogen Interface by selecting  Import / Export > Isogen (PCF) > Isogen Interface.

Dec‐09




From this dialog, you can see the .dwg files that were generated. The Output Dir shows where your finished Iso drawings are stored.

16. Select a drawing from the Results field and click View to display the drawing.

17. Close the View and click Close to exit the Isogen interface.



Dec‐09


Î Exercise 2:  Generate isometric drawings for line L1002. In this exercise you will build a query to select the components for the iso drawing.

1. Select Import/Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > Generate Iso. 2. In the AutoPLANT Selections dialog pick < >. 3. In the Define Query select: Data Type = Relationship Attribute Field = LineNumber Attribute Value = L1002

4. In the Active Query click Add.

Note:

This field becomes enabled once the query is defined.

5. Click OK to enable the Preferences dialog.   6. In the Connection Criteria Preferences dialog, add LINENUMBER to the Criteria Fields column.

7. In the Naming Rule field type “‐Training”

Dec‐09




8. Click OK. The Export Progress dialog will open.  When the process is complete, the OK button will be enabled. Once complete, you can view the isometric drawings.

9. Select Import/Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > ISOGEN Interface.

10. Select a drawing from the Results column.



Dec‐09


11. Click View to open the drawing in a viewer window.

12. Right‐mouse click in the window and choose an option to Pan, Zoom Previous, Zoom Window, and Zoom Extents.

13. Click Close. 14. Click Close to exit the Isogen Interface.

Dec‐09




Generating a Project Iso In the previous exercise, object selection, connection criteria and name rules are being set and managed through the  interface. If multiple s on a project will be creating the isometric drawings, this type of control can result in inconsistencies. The Project Iso functionality enables the team to set the parameters for the drawings in the project environment to be applied to all drawings in the current project.   The  interface is simplified and consistency across multiple ISOGEN runs is maintained.    There are basically two modes of operation:

1. You can generate your PCFs separately and manually run them through ISOGEN using the ISOGEN Interface application.

2. You can enable the Automatically run ISOGEN switch in the Preferences dialog before you perform an export.  If the PCF export is successful, it will automatically be run through ISOGEN. If this process is also successful, the PCF file will be deleted and leave you with the resulting DWG file.

Î Exercise:  Generate a Project Iso for Line L1004.   1. Select Import > Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > Generate Project Iso. A Project Selection dialog shows the results of the criteria selection in list format.

2. Select FINAL from the Style list.   3. Highlight ISO‐Training A100‐U100‐L1004 and Click OK.    4. The Preferences dialog opens.  Check Automatically run ISOGEN and click OK.   Automated Iso Generation


Dec‐09


The Export Progress dialog will open and report on the progress.

5. When the process is complete. Click OK.   6. To view the drawings select Import / Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > ISOGEN Interface.   7. Select a drawing from the Results column and click View to open the viewer.    8. Right mouse click in the window and choose an option to Pan, Zoom Previous, Zoom Window, and Zoom extents.   Things to look for when viewing the drawings:

ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Automatically generated dimensioning Bill of Material reports Miscellaneous Attachments Insulation marking

This exercise completed this module.

Dec‐09




Generating and Inspecting a PCF File This exercise explains the process of generating and inspecting a PCF file prior to running the ISOGEN interface to generate the iso.

Î Exercise:  Creating a PCF file.   1. Select  Import /Export > ISOGEN (PCF) > Generate Iso. 2. When the AutoPLANT Selections dialog displays, click on the Project tab. 3. Select Line number from the Project Selections. 4. Select line number L1004 from the list of line numbers and click OK.    5. Select Unit, Area, and Line number from the available fields in the Connection Criteria dialog.

Note:

This dialog displays to enable you to define the criteria used to break the model into separate PCF files. For example, if you had selected “All” components instead of only one line number when you defined your selection set, this option would break your selection into separate PCF files for every change in the any one of these fields.

As noted before, the Naming Rule area of this dialog enables you to specify the conventions used to name the PCF files as well as the line number used by ISOGEN within the Iso itself.   Notice that in our example we will name the Iso and Line number according to the Area, Unit and Line number. In addition to the fields used to name the Iso this convention can also use text strings as shown in the example where the string “ISO‐“ will precede every Iso generated with this rule.

Note:

Do not click OK until after the next step.

6. Click on the ISOGEN (PCF) tab. 7. Disable the Automatically run ISOGEN option.



Dec‐09


8. Select OK to generate the PCF file. The Iso Style is not relevant for this example.  It does not affect the contents of a PCF being created.    An Export Progress dialog will display showing the progress of the export as the PCF file is being generated.

9. When finished, click OK to close the Progress dialog.

Î Exercise 2: Generating an Isometric from a PCF file Now let’s examine the PCF file created in the last exercise.

1. Select ISOGEN Interface from the ISOGEN (PCF) submenu. 2. Select the ISO‐A100‐U100‐L1004.PCF file from the PCF Files window and click Run. The PCF is processed through ISOGEN and a message box displays telling whether the process was successful.  When complete, the file is listed in the Results window, with the resulting ISO‐1‐A‐L1000.i01.DXF drawing listed underneath.

Dec‐09




You can use this command to process multiple PCF files simultaneously by holding the Ctrl button while selecting the files.

3. The ISOGEN Interface can be used to view the .DXF file.   4. Select the drawing from the Results window and click the View button.

The drawing will display in the viewer as shown below. Once the DXF file is displayed in the viewer, you can click your right mouse button in the view window to display a selection menu of commands/options for viewing .

5. When finished click Close to exit the viewer. Automated Iso Generation


Dec‐09


Configuring ISOGEN Settings AutoPLANT provides a set of pre‐configured settings and switches for each of the listed Iso Types. Before executing the Generate Iso function, these settings can be modified through the ISOGEN Interface Config button.  The Config button launches the Project   application to enable you to assign settings used to generate your ISOGEN isometrics.   Configuring ISOGEN switches is considered an advance topic.   To learn how to configure the ISOGEN switches, refer to the ISOGEN course called AutoPLANT ISOGEN for s.   This exercise completes this course.

Dec‐09



Model Review

Model Review Now that you have completed this module, let’s review what you have learned.

Questions 1. As an component is placed in a model, all connectivity data is stored within the database.

ƒ ƒ

True   False

2. The ISOGEN application relies on accurate Port data.   ƒ ƒ

True False

3. A Tap Port enable the designer to add a section of pipe within an existing pipeline.   ƒ ƒ

True False

4. A Stop Sign added to a pipe segment means that no other pipe may be connected to the section.

ƒ ƒ

True False

5. A Piping Component File  (PCF) must be generated before a isometric drawing can be automatically created from an model.

ƒ ƒ

True   False



Dec‐09

Model Review

Answers   1. True: Connectivity data between components, including fasteners are stored within the database. Accurate information is crucial for the successful output for generating automatic isometrics from the model.

2. True:  A port contains data driven by the spec, including size, rating , facing, direction and location of a specific component.  This information is read by the ISOGEN application when creating a iso.

3. True:  Creating a Tap Port adds an additional port to a section of pipe, increasing the number of ports to three, instead of the customary two ports.  This port enable the designer to add additional components such as weldolets, saddles or sections of pipe used as drainage lines.

4. False:  Stop signs are added to a drawing to indicate where page breaks occur when the isometric drawing created for a specific pipeline must break across multiple sheets. The sheets are consecutively numbered, depending where stop signs are placed.

5. True:  AutoPLANT model data is first gathered to create a PCF file.  Once generated ISOGEN creates an AutoCAD compatible DXF formatted file that can be easily viewed and plotted from AutoCAD.

Dec‐09



Summary


ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ ƒ

Understand how model data is gathered for iso generation AutoPLANT model data for component connectivity and consistency Add miscellaneous attachments and annotation to a model Add stop signs to create page breaks on an iso Create automated isos using the ISOGEN interface.



Dec‐09



True False

2. The Orthographic drawing is stored in the same location as the Piping model.   ƒ ƒ

True False


True False

4. A Work Area View is stored with a Work Area file.   ƒ ƒ

True False

5. Adding text to a Paper Space layout will also be added to the model.   ƒ ƒ

True False

6. A layout and all properties can be copied.   ƒ ƒ

True False

7. Insulation symbols are added in the modeling environment to indicate a section of a pipe that will receive insulation during construction.

ƒ ƒ Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

8. A common annotation on a piping layout is the Long line number.   ƒ ƒ

True False

9. The AutoPLANT Selections tool enables you to select components based on a predefined query.

ƒ ƒ

True False

10. When creating a report, the Report Generator utility gathers the component data and stores it in a temporary database.

ƒ ƒ

True False

11. Import and Export functions enable the  to transfer valuable CAD data between other applications.

ƒ ƒ

True   False

12. Isometric drawings can be generated automatically from an AutoPLANT 3D model.   ƒ ƒ

True   False

13. PXF is the Plant Exchange Format for exchanging CAD data between other applications. ƒ ƒ

True False

14. Stop Signs are placed in a model whenever a Line Number occurs. ƒ ƒ

True False

15. PXF is a easy method for creating a new drawing from an existing drawing that may contain errors in a pipe run.

ƒ ƒ

True False

16. The Miscellaneous Attachments menu give you options for adding valuable information to a pipe run, to be shown in the Isometric drawing.

ƒ ƒ

True False

Course Summary


Dec‐09

Review


2. True: When you launch a project from Document Manager, you have the option of creating new drawing that will be included in the appropriate location. The orthographic drawing is created by the Piping application and will reside in the same location as the model files.

3. False:  Work Areas enable you to access the intelligence within drawings added to a Work Area.  Only your current drawing can be edited. All referenced drawings are READ ONLY.

4. True:  Once you create a Work Area you can create views of the model. These views are saved to the Work Area file. Work Area Views are used for isolating specific areas of the model to create layouts in Paper Space.

5. False: Any text you add to a Paper Space drawing does not change the model. The modeling environment stays clean.

6. True: Although layouts can be easily copied, it is a recommended idea to create a template for common components.

7. False: Insulation symbols are placed in Paper Space and are not included in the modeling environment.

8. True: The Long line number is a common annotation that include the Line number, spec and size rating for the pipe.

9. True: Selecting components from you current drawing or from multiple drawings within a project is performed by the AutoPLANT Selections tools.

10. True: The Report Generator first stores the data in a temporary database where the data can be first cleaned of any records that no longer have corresponding components in the model.

11. True: AutoPLANT has the ability to export CAD data in three formats, including PXF, JSM and PCL. These file formats are used to transfer data between other applications.

12. True: Fully dimensioned and annotated isometric drawings are automatically created by exporting data from the model in PCF format. This data is imported by the ISOGEN interface, included in the AutoPLANT Piping application.

13. True: Exporting data in a PXF format, enables the  to export model data to the AutoPIPE stress analsys application. This format also provides a method of transferring legacy data from the PRO‐PIPE and DESIGNER applications to the current AutoPLANT 3D Design applications.

Dec‐09


Course Summary

Review

14. False: Stop Signs are place along a piping run to indicate where page breaks occur when generating automatic fabrication drawings using the ISOGEN interface.

15. True: A PXF file is generated by exporting CAD data from an existing model. Any errors along a pipe run are not exported, providing a quick method of exporting only those sections of the pipe run that are error free. The resulting PXF file can be imported as a new drawing.

16. True: The Miscellaneous Attachments menu include a list of informational objects such as flow arrows, wall openings, reference dimensions and spool indentifiers. These markers, when added to the piping model are transferred to the completed isometric drawing.

Course Summary


Dec‐09

Bentley Autoplant Design V8i Ss1 4o12a

Overview 5o1f4z

More details 6z3438

Related Documents c2h70

Bentley Autoplant Design V8i Ss1 4o12a

Bentley Autoplant Project Configuration V8i Ss1.pdf 4b435y

Autoplant Piping V8i Bentley 281g6

Autoplant Bentley Dossier 6q42v

Bentley Substation V8i Overview 3745o

Bentley Autopipe V8i 3t4lb

More Documents from "Solomon Emavwodia" 1t6m43

Basic Environmental Engineering.pdf c4g3f

Bentley Autoplant Design V8i Ss1 4o12a

The Five Tasks Of The Strategic Management Process 3d5or

Sheth Model, Industrial Buyer Behaviour 733d65

Esl Word Power 1 (pdf E-book) - Englishwsheets.com Sample Pages 482i3n

Music Theory In Practise Grade 5 (abrsm) 6k276a